Sharp DVD VCR Combo DV RW370X User Manual

VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
MODEL  
DV-RW370X  
OPERATION MANUAL  
Please read this Operation Manual carefully before  
using your VCR/DVD RECORDER COMBINATION.  
DV-RW370  
OPEN/CLOSE  
PAL  
STOP/EJECT  
PLAY  
STOP  
PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
OPERATE  
REW  
F.FWD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
PROGRAMME  
(TRACKING)  
DUBBING  
OUTPUT SELECT  
The region number for  
this unit is 4.  
4
PAL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
Precautions (cont’d)  
Location and Handling  
• Do not stand the unit vertically. Install the unit in a horizontal and stable position. Do not place anything directly on top  
of the unit. Do not place the unit directly on top of the TV.  
• Depending on the TV, noise or disturbance of the picture and/or sound may be generated if the unit is placed too close  
to your TV. In this case, please ensure enough space between your TV and the unit.  
• Do not cover or place the unit in enclosed spaces to prevent excessive temperature build up.  
• Keep the distances 20cm around apparatus of ventilation openings.  
• Do not place the unit in direct sunlight, or near heat sources. Do not place any combustible objects on the device (candles, etc.).  
• Depending on the environment, the temperature of the unit may increase slightly. This is not a malfunction.  
• Keep the unit away from strong magnetic objects.  
• Do not place any object containing water or other liquids on the unit. In the event that liquid should enter the cabinet,  
unplug the unit immediately and contact the retailer or service centre approved by SHARP immediately.  
• Do not remove the unit cabinet. Touching parts inside the cabinet could result in electric shock and/or damage to the  
unit. For service and adjustment inside the cabinet, call a qualified dealer or service centre approved by SHARP.  
• Be sure to remove a disc and unplug the AC power cord from the output before carrying the unit.  
• Disconnect the mains plug to shut off when find troubles or not in use.  
• The mains plug shall remain readily operable.  
• Read both manual instructions to ensure correct and safe installation and interconnection of the unit in multimedia systems.  
Copyright  
Copyright may exist in material you wish to record. Copying such material without permission of the relevant licensee(s) or  
owner(s) of the copyright is prohibited by law. SHARP is not in a position to authorise the recording of copyright works and  
nothing in this manual should be read or implied as giving that authority.  
Copy Protection  
This unit supports Macrovision copy protection.  
On DVD discs that include a copy protection code, if the contents of the DVD disc are copied using a VCR, the copy  
protection code prevents the videotape copy from playing normally.  
U.S. Patent Nos. 4,631,603; 4,819,098; 4,907,093; 5,315,448; and 6,516,132.  
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual  
property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorised by Macrovision, and is intended  
for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorised by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or  
disassembly is prohibited.  
• When attempting to record copy protected material on a VCR or other recording device, the copy protection will  
activate and the protected material will not be recorded correctly. In addition, attempting to display copy protected  
material on a monitor connected via a VCR, whether for the purpose of viewing or not, will cause an inferior quality  
picture to be displayed. This is not a fault of the equipment. Please view copy protected material by connecting the  
product directly to the monitor.  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby  
Laboratories.  
Dolby Digital Recording  
“Dolby® Digital Recording enables consumers to record high-quality video with stereo sound on recordable DVD  
discs. The technology, when utilized instead of PCM recording, also saves recordable disc space, allowing for higher  
video resolution or extended recording time on each DVD. DVDs created using Dolby Digital Recording will play  
back on all DVD-Video players.”  
Note: This is true when the players are compatible with actual recordable DVD discs.  
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.  
“Kodak Picture CD COMPATIBLE” is a trademark of Eastman Kodak Company.  
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under license.  
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation.  
EN  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
Precautions (cont’d)  
Notice for Progressive Scan Outputs  
Consumers should note that not all high definition television sets are fully compatible with this product and may  
cause artifacts to be displayed in the picture. In case of picture problems with 525 or 625 progressive scan output, it is  
recommended that the user switch the connection to the ‘standard definition’ output. If there are questions regarding  
your TV set compatibility with this 525p or 625p DVD player, please contact our customer service centre.  
“Licensed under one or more of U.S. Pat. 4,972,484, 5,214,678, 5,323,396, 5,530,655, 5,539,829, 5,544,247, 5,606,618,  
5,610,985, 5,740,317, 5,777,992, 5,878,080, or 5,960,037.”  
If There Is Noise Interference on the TV While a Broadcast Is Being Received  
Depending on the reception condition of the TV, interference may appear on the TV monitor while you watch a TV  
broadcast and the unit is left on. This is not a malfunction of the unit or the TV. To watch a TV broadcast, turn off the unit.  
Maintenance  
SERVICING  
1. Please refer to relevant topics in the “Troubleshooting” on page 91 before returning the product.  
2. Do not attempt to service this unit yourself. Instead, unplug it and contact a SHARP Approved Service Centre for  
inspection.  
3. Be sure the service technician uses authorised replacement parts or their equivalents. Unauthorised parts may cause  
fire, electrical shock, or other hazards.  
4. Following any service or repair, be sure the service technician performs safety checks to certify that this unit is in safe  
operating order.  
CLEANING THE CABINET  
• Use a soft cloth slightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use a solution containing alcohol, spirits,  
ammonia or abrasive.  
CLEANING DISCS  
• When a disc becomes dirty, clean it with a cleaning cloth. Wipe the disc from the centre out. Do not wipe in a circular  
motion.  
• Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners, detergent, abrasive cleaning agents or  
antistatic spray intended for analogue records.  
RECOMMENDED MEASURES FOR OPTIMUM PICTURE EXCELLENCE  
This unit is a precision device constructed using extremely accurate technology.  
• The disc cannot be played if the disc drive component is worn out or if the internal pick up lens is dirty.  
• If this unit still does not perform properly although you refer to the relevant sections and to “Troubleshooting” on  
page 91, the laser optical pickup unit may be dirty. Consult a SHARP Approved Service Centre for inspection and  
cleaning of the laser optical pickup unit.  
Soiling or friction affecting the pickup lens or disc drive can impair the image quality. At the worst, neither video  
nor audio will be played back. To maintain optimum picture quality, the Player should be serviced (cleaned  
and replacement of some parts) every 1,000 hours. Note that this period varies depending on the environment  
(temperature, humidity, dust, etc.) in which the unit is used. Contact your authorised SHARP supplier for details.  
DISC HANDLING  
• When you handle a disc, hold it by its edge and try not to touch the surface of the disc.  
• Always store a disc in its protective case when it is not used.  
AUTO HEAD CLEANING  
• Automatically cleans video heads as you insert or remove a cassette, so you can see a clear picture.  
• Playback picture may become blurred or interrupted while the TV programme reception is clear. Dirt accumulated on  
the video heads after a long period of use, or the usage of rental or worn tapes can cause this problem. If a streaky or  
snowy picture appears during playback, the video heads in your unit may need to be cleaned.  
1. Please visit your local Audio/Video store and purchase a good quality VHS Video Head Cleaner.  
2. If a Video Head Cleaner does not solve the problem, please consult your dealer or an authorized service centre.  
Note  
• Remember to read the instructions along with the video head cleaner before use.  
• Clean video heads only when problems occur.  
For Customer Use:  
Read carefully the information located at the bottom of your unit and enter below the Serial No. Retain this  
information for future reference.  
Model No.: VCR/DVD RECORDER COMBINATION: DV-RW370X  
Serial No.: __________________________________  
4
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
Table of contents  
PBC function for Video CDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48  
Before you start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2  
Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2  
Table of contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Symbols used in this Operation Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6  
Functional overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Installing batteries in the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10  
About the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10  
Child Lock function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10  
The VCR/DVD recorder Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11  
Guide to On-Screen Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11  
Playing back a Video CD using the Title menu . . . . . . . . . . . . .48  
Cancelling and Recalling the PBC function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49  
Special playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49  
Resume playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49  
Fast forward / Fast reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50  
Skipping TV commercials during playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50  
Pause. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51  
Rapid Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51  
Step by step playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52  
Slow forward / Slow reverse playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52  
Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53  
Marker Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53  
Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54  
Title / Chapter search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54  
Track search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54  
Direct Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55  
Time search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55  
Repeat/Random/Programme playback / Slide Show. . . . . .56  
Repeat playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56  
Random playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57  
Programme playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58  
Slide Show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58  
DivX® VOD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59  
Selecting the format of audio and video. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59  
Switching subtitles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59  
Switching audio soundtrack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60  
Switching virtual surround system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60  
Switching camera angles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61  
Reducing block noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61  
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Connecting to a TV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14  
Connecting to external equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15  
Connecting to an Audio System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16  
Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Easy DVD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17  
Channel setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19  
Auto Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19  
Manual Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
To select a channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21  
To skip a Preset channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21  
Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21  
Setting the clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22  
Clock Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22  
Selecting the On-Screen Display (OSD) language . . . . . . . .23  
Selecting the TV aspect ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23  
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Information on DVD recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24  
Type of discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24  
Recordable discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24  
Recording mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24  
Restrictions on recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24  
Information on copy control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25  
Making discs playable in other DVD players (Finalise) . . . . . .25  
Usable discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25  
Formatting a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26  
Choosing the recording format of a brand-new  
DVD-RW disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26  
Setting Auto Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27  
Recording Audio Select (XP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27  
Reformatting a disc manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28  
Selecting the Sound mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29  
Setting External Input Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29  
Setting Bilingual Recording Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29  
Basic recording / One-touch Timer Recording (OTR) . . . . . .30  
Timer Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31  
Checking, cancelling, or correcting the timer programming  
information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32  
To stop the timer recording in progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32  
If the timer programming did not complete correctly . . . . . .32  
Hints for Timer Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33  
Satellite Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34  
Settings for external equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35  
Recording from external equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35  
DV dubbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36  
Guide to DV and On-Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36  
Dubbing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38  
Setting a disc to protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40  
Finalising discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40  
Auto finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41  
Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Information on disc editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
Guide to a title list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
Edit the recorded disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
Editing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63  
Notes for deleting titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63  
Editing discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64  
Deleting titles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64  
Editing title names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65  
Guide to edit title name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66  
Adding or deleting chapter marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67  
Setting pictures for thumbnails. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69  
Deleting a part of a title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70  
Dividing a title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72  
Combining titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73  
Adding titles to a Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74  
Erasing all Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75  
Setting or releasing the title protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76  
Setting or clearing all chapter marks in one title . . . . . . . . . . .77  
Changing the Setup menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
Tour of the Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78  
Language setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79  
Display setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80  
Audio setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81  
Video setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83  
DVD-Videos Parental Lock level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85  
VCR functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87  
Recording and One-touch Timer Recording (OTR) . . . . . . . .87  
Basic Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87  
One-touch Timer Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88  
Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89  
Index search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89  
Time search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89  
Other operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90  
Hi-Fi Stereo Sound System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90  
Disc Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Information on playing back DVDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42  
Playable discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42  
Colour systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42  
Region codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42  
Playing back on DivX® file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42  
Basic playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43  
Hint for DVD playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43  
Playing back a DVD-RW / DVD-R / DVD+RW / DVD+R disc . .43  
Playing back a DVD-Video / CD / Video CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44  
Playing back an MP3 / JPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44  
Playing back a DivX® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45  
Playing back discs using the Disc menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47  
Playing back a disc using the Title menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48  
Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91  
Language code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95  
Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97  
EN  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
Features  
Editing title names:  
Recording  
You can change the title name you prefer.  
Add or delete chapter marks (DVD-RW only):  
The unit is compatible with DVD-RW discs, which are  
recordable repeatedly, and DVD-R discs, which are  
recordable only once.  
You can easily add chapter marks for easy editing.  
Choose the picture for thumbnails (VR mode only):  
You can select a picture for thumbnail at a point you like.  
A scene delete from a title (VR mode only):  
If the title has many commercials or the part you don't want,  
you can erase them from the title.  
Also, this unit allows you to record to the video cassette  
tape. You can choose either one for your convenience.  
Recording up to 8 programmes:  
VCR MODE  
DVD MODE  
You can programme the unit to record up to 8 programmes,  
up to a month in advance. Daily or weekly programme  
recordings are also possible.  
Making your own Playlist (VR mode, Playlist only):  
While the Original list remains unchanged, you can edit titles  
as you prefer and create your own Playlist.  
One-touch Timer Recording:  
You can set your required recording end time easily. Every  
time [VCR REC/OTR I] or [DVD REC/OTR I] is pressed  
during basic recording, the recording end time will be  
increased by 30 minutes up to 8 hours. The recording  
automatically stops when the recording time you set is  
finished.  
Divide title / Combine titles / Add titles / Erase all titles  
Protecting titles (VR mode, Original only):  
To avoid accidental editing or erasing of titles, the protect  
function is useful when set to “ON” in the Original list.  
Dubbing mode:  
Compatibility  
DVD MODE  
You can copy a DVD disc to a videotape or copy a videotape to  
a DVD disc. This function will be available only if the DVD disc  
and the videotape are not copy-protected.  
Playing back discs recorded in Video mode on any regu-  
lar DVD player:  
Discs recorded in Video mode can be played back on regular  
DVD players, including computer DVD drives compatible  
with DVD-Video playback. You will need to finalise the discs  
recorded in Video mode to play back in other DVD players.  
Left channel stereo recording:  
The unit can record monaural sound from the Left channel  
as pseudo stereo sound (same Left and Right channels)  
automatically. (This function is not available for input source of  
AV3 jacks on the front panel.)  
*
DVD-Video Format (Video mode) is a new format for recording  
on DVD-RW/-R discs that was approved by the DVD Forum in  
2000. Adoption of this format is optional for manufactures of  
DVD playback devices and there are DVD-Video players, DVD-  
ROM drives and other DVD playback devices available that  
cannot play back DVD-RW/-R discs recorded in the DVD-Video  
Format.  
DVD MODE  
Automatic Chapter marks setting:  
Chapter marks will be added to recordings as you set them in  
the Setup menu before starting to record.  
Automatic Title menu making (Video mode):  
The unit creates Title menus automatically when finalising discs.  
Automatic Playlist making (VR mode):  
The unit creates a Playlist automatically after recording.  
Automatic finalising (Video mode):  
You can finalise discs automatically at the end of the disc  
space if you set this in the Setup menu.  
Official DivX® Certified product  
Plays all versions of DivX® video (including DivX®6 ) with  
standard playback of DivX® media files.  
Symbols used in this Operation Manual  
To show what recording mode or media type applies to each  
function, the following symbols appear at the beginning of  
each operating item.  
Playback  
Theatre surround sound:  
When the unit is connected to an amplifier or a decoder  
compatible with Dolby Digital or DTS, you can enjoy  
theatre-quality surround sound from discs recorded with the  
surround sound system.  
DVD MODE  
Symbol Description  
Description refers to VHS tapes  
Use only cassettes marked VHS (  
).  
PAL  
Quick search:  
Description refers to DVD-RW in Video mode  
You can easily find the part you want to watch using the  
search function. Search for a desired point on a disc by title,  
chapter or time.  
Description refers to DVD-RW in VR mode  
Description refers to DVD-R in Video mode  
Description refers to DVD-Video discs  
*Description refers to DVD+RW discs  
*Description refers to DVD+R discs  
Description refers to DVD-RAM discs  
Description refers to Audio CDs  
Playback from Original or a Playlist (VR mode):  
You can play back titles using either the Original list or a  
Playlist.  
Virtual Surround System:  
You can enjoy stereophonic space through your exciting 2  
channel stereo system.  
Playing back on DivX® file:  
The unit performs a DivX® file purchased through the official  
site of DivX® Video which is called DivX® Video-On-Demand  
(VOD) services, and recorded it on the DVD-RW/-R or CD-RW/-R.  
Playing back on MP3, JPEG and Kodak Picture CD files:  
You can enjoy MP3, JPEG and Kodak Picture CD files which  
are recorded on CD-RW/-R.  
VCR MODE  
Description refers to Video CDs  
Quick search for what you want to watch:  
You can easily find the part you want to watch using the Index  
or Time search functions. An index mark will be assigned at  
the beginning of each recording you make. For Time search  
function, you can go to a specific point on a tape by entering  
the exact amount of time you wish to skip.  
Description refers to CD-RW/-R discs with  
MP3 files  
Description refers to CD-RW/-R discs with  
JPEG files, including Kodak Picture CD files  
Description refers to DVD-RW/-R and  
Editing  
DVD MODE  
®
CD-RW/-R discs with DivX files  
Delete titles:  
If the title is no longer you need, you can delete it from the  
disc. This is a useful method if you want to increase the  
capacity of DVD-RW discs.  
*
There may be a disc which cannot be used or played back.  
6
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
Functional overview  
*
*
Front Panel  
1
2
3
4
DV-RW370  
OPEN/CLOSE  
PAL  
STOP/EJECT  
PLAY  
STOP  
PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
OPERATE  
DV-IN  
(AV3) VIDEO L(MONO)-AUDIO-R  
REW  
F.FWD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
PROGRAMME  
(TRACKING)  
DUBBING  
OUTPUT SELECT  
* * *  
6 7 8 9 10 11  
*
5
12  
13 14 15  
16 17 18 19 20 21  
You can also turn on the unit by pressing these buttons or insert a tape.  
*
1 Cassette compartment* (VCR)  
11 Remote control sensor  
• Insert a tape here.  
• Receives signals from your remote control so  
you can control the unit from a distance.  
2 OPEN/CLOSE A button* (DVD)  
• Press to open or close the disc tray.  
3 OUTPUT indicators (VCR / DVD)  
12 Display (VCR / DVD)  
• Refer to “Front Panel Display Guide” on page 13.  
• Indicates the selected component (VCR or DVD).  
13 PROGRAMME (TRACKING) L / K buttons  
(VCR / DVD)  
4 Disc tray (DVD)  
• Place the disc here when open.  
• Press to change the channel up or down.  
• Press to adjust the tracking manually during  
VCR playback.  
5 OPERATE button  
• Press to turn on or off the unit.  
• Red LED lights up when power is ON.  
• If timer programming is set, press to switch the  
unit to timer-standby mode.  
14 DUBBING button (VCR / DVD)  
• Press to start VCR to DVD (DVD to VCR)  
duplication which you set in the Setup menu.  
15 OUTPUT SELECT button (VCR / DVD)  
• Press to select the DVD mode or the VCR  
mode.  
6 STOP C/EJECT A button (VCR)  
• In stop mode, press to remove the tape from  
the unit.  
• Press to stop the tape motion.  
• Press to stop a timer recording of VCR.  
16 STOP C button (DVD)  
• Press to stop playback or recording.  
• Press to stop a timer recording of DVD.  
7 REW E button* (VCR)  
• Press to rewind the video tape.  
17 PLAY B button* (DVD)  
• Press to view the picture rapidly in reverse  
during the playback mode. (Rewind Search)  
• Press to turn the unit on when the video tape  
is inserted and start rewinding the tape.  
• Press to start or resume playback.  
18 REC/OTR button (DVD)  
• Press once to start a basic recording.  
• Press repeatedly to set the One-touch Timer  
Recording.  
8 F.FWD D button* (VCR)  
• Press to rapidly advance the video tape.  
• Press to view the picture rapidly in forward  
during playback. (Forward Search)  
19 DV-IN input jack (AV4) (VCR / DVD)  
• Use to connect the DV output of external  
equipment with a DV cable.  
20 VIDEO input jack (AV3) (VCR / DVD)  
• Use to connect external equipment with a  
standard Video cable.  
21 AUDIO input jacks (AV3) (VCR / DVD)  
• Use to connect external equipment with a  
standard Audio cable.  
• Press to turn the unit on when the video tape  
is inserted and start rapidly advancing the tape.  
9 PLAY B button* (VCR)  
• Press to start playback.  
10 REC/OTR button (VCR)  
• Press once to start a basic recording.  
• Press repeatedly to set the One-touch Timer  
Recording.  
Button names described in the Operation Manual  
The instructions in this manual are described mainly with the operations using the remote control.  
Some operations can be carried out using the buttons on the front panel.  
EN  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
Functional overview (cont’d)  
Rear Panel  
DVD/VCR  
DVD  
ANTENNA  
IN  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO S-VIDEO COMPONENT  
AV2 (DECODER)  
AUDIO OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
VIDEO OUT  
Y
P
/CB  
B
L
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
AV1 (TV)  
P
/CR  
R
R
OUT  
1
2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10  
1
2
Mains cable  
6
7
8
AUDIO OUT (ANALOG) jacks (DVD)  
• Connect to a standard AC outlet.  
• Connect to the audio input jacks on your TV. Use a  
commercially available Audio cable.  
AV1 (TV) Scart terminal (VCR / DVD)  
• Connect to the Scart terminal on your TV.  
Use the supplied Scart output adaptor with the  
Video / Audio cables if your TV has no Scart  
terminal.  
AV2 (DECODER) Scart terminal (VCR / DVD)  
• Connect to the Scart terminal of VCR, camcorder, or  
other Audio-Video equipment. Use a commercially  
available Scart cable.  
S-VIDEO OUT jack (DVD)  
• Connect to the S-Video input jack on your TV. Use a  
commercially available S-Video cable.  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks (DVD)  
• Connect to the component video input jacks on  
your TV.  
Use a commercially available Component video  
cable.  
3
4
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jack (DVD)  
• Connect to an amplifier with a digital input jack  
such as a Dolby Digital decoder, DTS decoder or  
MPEG decoder.  
9
ANTENNA OUT jack (VCR / DVD)  
• Connect to the Aerial jack on your TV, cable box or  
direct broadcast system.  
Use the supplied Round Coaxial cable.  
Use a commercially available Optical cable.  
10 ANTENNA IN jack (VCR / DVD)  
5
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (COAXIAL) jack (DVD)  
• Connect to an amplifier with a digital input jack  
such as a Dolby Digital decoder, DTS decoder or  
MPEG decoder.  
• Connect to an antenna or cable.  
Use a commercially available Coaxial cable.  
Note  
• Do not touch the inner pins of the jacks on the rear panel. Electrostatic discharge may cause permanent damage to  
the unit.  
• This unit does not have an RF modulator.  
You can also turn on the unit by pressing these buttons  
when the remote control is in DVD mode.  
Remote Control  
*
1
33  
1
DUBBING button (VCR / DVD)  
• Press to start VCR to DVD (DVD to VCR) duplication  
which you set in the Setup menu.  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
32*  
2
3
4
31  
28  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
2
OPERATE button (VCR / DVD)  
30  
29  
• Press to turn on or off the unit.  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
5
• If timer programming is set, press to switch the unit  
to the timer-standby mode.  
6
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
27  
26  
7
8
3
4
TIMER PROG. button (VCR / DVD)  
ENTER  
RETURN  
• Press to display the timer programme setting menu.  
9
10  
11  
T-SET button (VCR / DVD)  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
1
2
3
• Press to enter the timer-standby mode. In the timer-  
standby mode, press to cancel the mode and to turn  
on the unit.  
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
25  
24  
6
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
5
6
ZOOM button (DVD)  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
• During playback, press to enlarge the picture on the  
screen.  
0
23  
19  
12*  
REV  
FWD  
VCR button  
22  
21  
PLAY  
• Press to activate the remote control in VCR mode.  
(See page 11.)  
13  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
• Press to select the VCR output mode.  
STOP  
14  
16  
7
TOP MENU button (DVD)  
• Press to display the Title menu.  
15  
17  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
20  
18  
8
Cursor K / L / s / B buttons (VCR / DVD)  
• Press to select items or settings.  
8
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
Functional overview (cont’d)  
20 SLOW button (VCR)  
• During playback, press to view the video tape in  
slow motion.  
9
RETURN  
/
button (VCR / DVD)  
• Press to return to the previously displayed menu screen.  
• Press and hold it for more than 5 seconds to protect  
any operations both the unit and the remote control.  
21 DVD REC/OTR I button  
• Press to activate the remote control in DVD mode.  
(See page 11.)  
10 Number buttons (VCR / DVD)  
• Press to select channel numbers.  
• Press once to start a basic recording.  
• Press repeatedly to set the One-touch Timer  
Recording.  
• Press to select a title / chapter / track on the display. (DVD)  
• Press to enter values for settings in the Setup menu.  
• Press to enter the number in the Index or Time  
search in VCR mode.  
22 FWD D / q button (VCR / DVD)  
• Press to enter the characters in edit function. (DVD)  
DVD mode  
• During playback, press to forward fast.  
• When playback is paused, press to forward slowly.  
VCR mode  
11 CLEAR/C-RESET button (VCR / DVD)  
DVD mode  
• Press to clear the password once entered.  
• Press to cancel the programming for a disc.  
• Press to clear the selecting marker number in the  
marker setup mode.  
• Press to clear the programme once entered in the  
Timer Programming list.  
• Press to rapidly advance the video tape.  
• Press to view the picture rapidly in forward during  
playback.  
23 DISPLAY button (VCR / DVD)  
• Press to display the On-Screen Display.  
VCR mode  
24 SKIP H button (DVD)  
• During playback, press to skip to the previous  
chapter or track.  
• Press to reset the tape counter.  
12 PLAY B button* (VCR / DVD)  
• Press to start or resume playback.  
13 REV E / r button (VCR / DVD)  
• When playback is paused, press to play reverse step  
by step.  
DVD mode  
SKIP G button (DVD)  
• During playback, press to reverse fast.  
• When playback is paused, press to reverse slowly.  
VCR mode  
• During playback, press to skip to the next chapter or  
track.  
• When playback is paused, press to advance step by step.  
• Press to rewind the video tape.  
• Press to view the picture rapidly in reverse during  
the playback mode.  
25 PROG.  
/
buttons (VCR / DVD)  
DVD mode  
• Press to change the channel up or down.  
VCR mode  
14 VCR REC/OTR I button  
• Press once to start a basic recording.  
• Press repeatedly to set the One-touch Timer  
Recording.  
• Press to change the channel up or down.  
• Press to adjust the tracking during playback or in  
slow motion of the tape.  
• Press to activate the remote control in VCR mode.  
(See page 11.)  
• While playback is in still mode, you can adjust the  
vertically blurred picture.  
15 STOP C button (VCR / DVD)  
26 ENTER button (VCR / DVD)  
• Press to stop playing back or recording.  
• Press to confirm or select menu items.  
16 REPEAT  
button (DVD)  
27 MENU LIST button (DVD)  
• Press to display the repeat playback menu.  
• Press to display the Disc menu during playback.  
• Press to change the Original and Playlist on the TV  
screen. (VR mode only)  
17 AUDIO button (VCR / DVD)  
DVD mode  
• When receiving a bilingual broadcast, press to  
change the audio out setting to “Main”, “Sub”, and  
“Main / Sub”.  
• Press to change the bilingual audio source of an  
external equipment to “Main”, “Sub”, or “Main/Sub”.  
(Available only when the “External Input Audio” in  
the DVD setup menu is set to “Bilingual” in advance.)  
• Press to display the audio menu during playback.  
• Press to select the sound mode.  
28 DVD button  
• Press to activate the remote control in DVD mode.  
(See page 11.)  
• Press to select the DVD output mode.  
29 CM SKIP button (DVD)  
• During playback, press to skip 30 seconds.  
(See page 50.)  
30 RAPID PLAY button (DVD)  
• During playback, press to playback in a slightly  
faster/slower speed with keeping the audio quality.  
VCR mode  
• During playback of a Hi-Fi video tape, press to  
change the audio out setting to “STEREO”, “LEFT”,  
“RIGHT”, and “MONO”.  
• When receiving a bilingual broadcast, press to  
change the audio out setting to “Main”, “Sub”, and  
“Main/Sub”.  
• Press to change the bilingual audio source of an  
external equipment to “Main”, “Sub”, or “Main/Sub”.  
(Available only when the “External Input Audio” in  
the Setup menu is set to “Bilingual” in advance.)  
31 REC MODE button (VCR / DVD)  
• Press to switch the recording mode.  
32 OPEN/CLOSE EJECT A button* (VCR / DVD)  
• Press to open or close the disc tray.  
• Press to remove the tape from the unit.  
33 SETUP button (VCR / DVD)  
• Press to display the Setup menu in stop mode.  
18 PAUSE F button (VCR / DVD)  
• Press to pause playback or recording.  
Note  
19 SEARCH button (VCR)  
• Letters printed in blue are buttons effective only in  
VCR mode.  
• Press to call up the index or time search menu.  
EN  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
Functional overview (cont’d)  
Installing batteries in the remote control  
About the remote control  
Install two AA (R6) size batteries (supplied) into the  
remote control, carefully match with the polarity  
indicated inside the battery compartment.  
• Make sure there is no obstacle between the  
remote control and the remote control sensor on  
the unit.  
• Use within the operating range and angle as shown.  
• The maximum operable range as follows:  
DV-RW370  
OPEN/CLOSE  
1
2
3
P
AL  
STOP/EJECT  
PLAY  
STOP  
PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
OPERATE  
REW  
F.FWD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
PROGRAMME  
(TRACKING)  
DUBBING  
OUTPUT SELECT  
OPERATE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
DUBBING SETUP  
T-SET TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
Line of sight:  
approximately 7m  
approximately 5m  
within 30 degrees  
approximately 5m  
within 15 degrees  
approximately 3m  
within 30 degrees  
Either side of centre:  
Above:  
Below:  
• Remote control operation may become  
unreliable if the remote control sensor of the  
unit is being exposed by the strong sunlight or  
fluorescent light.  
• Remote controls for different devices can  
interfere with each other. Be careful when using  
remote controls for other equipment located  
close to the unit.  
• Replace the batteries when the operating range  
of the remote control reduces.  
Child Lock function  
This function protects any unexpected operations  
by the kids when recording important programme  
and so on.  
1
Press and hold [RETURN  
seconds.  
/
] for more than 5  
Caution  
• Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards  
such as leakage and bursting.  
“LOC” will be displayed  
on the front panel display  
and the Child lock is now  
activated.  
• If any buttons (except for [RETURN  
the remote control or the unit are pressed, “  
will appears on the TV screen.  
• Do not mix new and old batteries together.  
• Do not use different kinds of batteries together.  
• Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each  
battery match the indications inside the battery  
compartment.  
• Remove batteries if the equipment will not be  
used for a month or more.  
• When disposing used batteries, please comply  
with governmental regulations or the public  
instructions for environmental protection that  
apply in your country or area.  
• Do not recharge, short-circuit, heat, burn or  
disassemble batteries.  
/
]) on  
2
Press [RETURN  
seconds.  
/
] again for more than 5  
“LOC” disappears and the Child lock will be released.  
Note  
• When One-touch Timer Recording or Timer  
Recording has finished or if the power failure  
occurs during Child lock is activated, the  
function will be released.  
• Comply with the rules (ordinance) of each  
local government when disposing of worn-out  
batteries.  
10 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
Functional overview (cont’d)  
The VCR/DVD recorder Switching  
Because this product is a combination of a VCR and a DVD recorder, you must select first which component  
you wish to operate with [OUTPUT SELECT] on the front panel.  
Note  
VCR MODE  
Press [VCR] on the remote control.  
(Verify that the VCR OUTPUT indicator is lit.)  
• Press [OUTPUT SELECT] to select the VCR mode or the  
DVD mode.  
• Pressing only [OUTPUT SELECT] on the front panel  
DOES NOT switch the mode of the remote control.  
You MUST select the correct mode on the remote  
control.  
• You cannot switch to the mode (VCR or DVD) that is in  
the timer-standby mode.  
DVD MODE  
Press [DVD] on the remote control.  
(Verify that the DVD OUTPUT indicator is lit.)  
DV-RW370  
OPEN/CLOSE  
P
A
L
OPERATE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
STOP/EJECT  
PLAY  
STOP  
PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
OPERATE  
T-SET TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
REW  
F.FWD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
PROGRAMME  
(TRACKING)  
DUBBING  
OUTPUT SELECT  
VCR  
DVD  
ZOOM  
CM SKIP  
• If the media is available, you can start recording by  
pressing [VCR REC/OTR I] or [DVD REC/OTR I] on  
the remote control even if another equipment (VCR or  
DVD) is selected. In this case, the mode of the remote  
control will be automatically switched to the appropriate  
component.  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
VCR button  
DVD button  
ENTER  
RETURN  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
1
2
3
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
4
5
6
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
VCR  
DVD  
REV  
FWD  
DVD  
DVD OUTPUT  
indicator  
PLAY  
VCR  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
STOP  
• In the wrong mode, the unit does not respond to your  
commands correctly. Before starting your desired  
operation, select the correct mode by following the  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
OUTPUT SELECT  
button  
OUTPUT SELECT  
VR  
V
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
+
1
0
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
STOP  
Press  
first.  
instruction (  
or  
) of under the  
VCR OUTPUT  
indicator  
D
D
M
N
A
I
O
V
R
/
V
D
O
M
I
N
O
N
7
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
subject heading.  
Guide to On-Screen Displays  
DISPLAY menu  
1
4
1
VCR mode  
DVD mode  
DVD  
VCR  
DVD  
VCR  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
1
1
0:00:00  
DVD-R  
12:00  
P08  
STEREO  
2
3
+
1
0
+
1
0
PLA  
Y
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
STOP  
Press  
first.  
Video mode  
C
D
N
TN  
/
N
A527D  
N
A
P08  
Main  
With a disc inserted  
into the unit, press  
[DISPLAY] to display the  
On-Screen Display. The  
menu shows information  
about what is recorded  
on the disc.  
Press [DISPLAY] to  
display the On-Screen  
display.  
While in the VCR  
mode, the On-Screen  
Display of the VCR  
mode is displayed.  
5
2
SP  
0:00:00 STEREO  
SP  
1:35  
6
4
5
6
3
1 Disc type and format mode  
1 Status of the current tape  
2 Current time  
In some descriptions in this manual, only one  
type of disc is indicated as an example.  
2 Position number and an audio status of the  
programme  
3 Current position number and an audio  
status of the receiving broadcast or external  
equipment  
3 Recording mode and remaining time  
4 Title number, chapter number and the time  
lapse of disc playback  
4 Recording or playing back mode  
5 Tape Counter  
6 Audio status of the currently playing back  
video tape  
5 Each icon means:  
: Search  
: Marker  
: Audio  
: Noise Reduction  
: Zoom  
: Subtitle  
Note  
: Angle (except VR mode)  
: Repeat  
: Surround  
• This is an example screen for explanation.  
Displayed items are depending on the actual  
mode.  
6 Status of the current disc  
EN 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
Functional overview (cont’d)  
Setup menus  
Press [SETUP] to display the Setup menu, then press [ENTER] to display each menu, using [Cursor K / L].  
These menus provide entries to all main functions of the unit.  
<DVD-RW / DVD-R (Video mode)>  
1 Format (DVD-RW only):  
Allows you to erase all of the  
recorded content on the disc.  
The disc will be completely  
blank.  
• Erased content cannot be  
called back.  
Setup  
Disc  
Required Setting  
Playback  
Display  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Format  
1
2
Finalise  
Recording  
Clock  
Channel  
Disc  
• A DVD-RW disc formatted  
with this unit cannot be  
used on other DVD recorders  
without any recording using  
this unit.  
1 Required Setting:  
To set up the required setting.  
2 Playback:  
<DVD-RW (VR mode)>  
Disc  
To set up the unit to play discs as  
you prefer.  
3 Display:  
To set up the OSD screen and the  
front display of the unit as you  
prefer.  
4 Recording:  
To set up the unit to record on  
discs as you prefer.  
5 Clock:  
To set up the clock of the unit as  
you need.  
6 Channel:  
To adjust the channel setting of  
the unit as you prefer.  
7 Disc / CD Playback Mode:  
When a DVD-Video  
(commercially available), a  
brand new DVD-R disc or a  
DVD-RW/-R disc with DivX® files  
is inserted into the unit, you  
cannot select “Disc”.  
“CD Playback Mode” is available  
only when an Audio CD, Video CD  
or a CD-RW/-R disc with MP3 or  
JPEG files is inserted into the unit.  
You cannot select “CD Playback  
Mode” when CD-RW/-R disc with  
DivX® files is inserted into the unit.  
Format  
• If you want to use a disc only  
formatted with this unit on  
another DVD recorder, you  
have to re-format the disc on  
that recorder.  
1
2
3
Finalise  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
2 Finalise:  
Allows you to finalise a disc  
containing recorded titles.  
3 Disc Protect (VR mode only):  
Allows you to protect a disc  
from accidental editing or  
recording.  
<CD / Video CD / MP3 / JPEG /  
KODAK PICTURE CD>  
CD Playback Mode  
Random Play  
4
Program Play  
5
4 Random Play:  
PBC (Video CD only)  
Slide Show  
ON  
5
6
To activate the random  
playback feature.  
5 sec.  
5
7
5 Program Play  
(Audio CD / Video CD without  
PBC function):  
To activate the programmed  
playback feature.  
6 PBC (Video CD only):  
Turn the PBC function “ON” or  
“OFF”.  
7 Slide Show  
(JPEG / KODAK PICTURE CD  
files only):  
Select the display time of the  
slide show mode.  
Note  
• This is an example screen only for explanation. Displayed items are depending on the disc you inserted.  
12 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
Functional overview (cont’d)  
4
2
Front Panel Display Guide  
1
3
6
5
: Appears when a DVD-R disc is inserted into  
the unit.  
1. Current Status of the unit  
: Appears when disc playback is paused.  
Appears also during step by step playback.  
: Appears when the Timer Recording is  
proceeding in VCR.  
: Appears when playing back a disc.  
: Appears when VCR is in the timer-standby  
mode.  
: Appears during slow forward or slow reverse  
playback.  
: Flashes when switch to the timer-standby  
mode while programming cannot set.  
: Flashes when a programme cannot be  
performed for some reasons.  
: Appears when the timer programming or  
One-touch Timer Recording (OTR) is set and is  
operating.  
Appears when the unit goes into the Satellite  
Link standby mode.  
: Appears during VCR to DVD duplication  
process.  
Flashes when all the timer programmes are  
finished.  
Flashes when there is an error in programming.  
: Appears during DVD to VCR duplication  
process.  
: Appears when recording.  
Flashes when recording being paused.  
: Appears during repeat playback.  
3. Recording mode  
• Selected recording mode appears.  
(only for disc playback)  
: Appears when a tape is in the unit.  
4. Title / Track and Chapter mark  
2. Disc type and Current status of the unit  
: Title / track number  
: Appears when an Audio CD or a CD-RW/-R  
disc is inserted into the unit.  
: Chapter number  
: Appears when a Video CD is inserted into the  
unit.  
5. Displays the following  
: Appears when a DVD / DivX® is inserted into  
the unit, or when recording or the timer-  
standby mode.  
: Flashes when switch to the timer-standby  
mode while programming cannot set.  
: Flashes when a programme cannot be  
performed for some reasons.  
• Playing back time  
• Current title / chapter / track number  
• Recording time / remaining time  
• Clock  
• Channel number  
• VCR tape counter  
• One-touch Timer Recording (OTR) remaining time  
: Appears when a DVD-RW disc is inserted into  
the unit.  
: Appears when the progressive scan  
system is activated.  
6.  
Display message  
The unit is loading a disc.  
The unit is turning on.  
The unit is turning off.  
Data is being recorded on  
a disc.  
The PBC function of the  
Video CD is activated.  
The disc tray is opening.  
The disc tray is closing.  
The DV input is selected.  
The Satellite Link is  
activated.  
The unit is protecting by the  
Child lock.  
EN 13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections  
Connecting to a TV  
• Be sure to turn off the unit and equipment to be connected before connecting.  
• Read through the Operation Manual for the equipment to be connected.  
• Be sure to keep the unit connection cables separate from the TV antenna cable when you install the unit, because it  
may cause electrical interference when you are watching television programmes.  
Basic TV connection  
Antenna  
To Aerial jack  
(Back of TV)  
Cable  
Signal  
Video / Audio cable (supplied)  
Scart /  
3
RCA cable  
(commercially  
available)  
or  
3
2
Scart cable (commercially available)  
Scart output  
adaptor  
(supplied)  
Round  
Coaxial  
cable  
or  
or  
(supplied)  
DVD/VCR  
DVD  
ANTENNA  
DIGIT
AUDIO S-VIDEO COMPONENT  
OUT OUT  
AV2 (DECODER)  
AUDIO T  
VIDEO OUT  
Y
1
IN  
P
/CB  
B
L
RF cable  
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
AV1 (TV)  
P
/CR  
R
R
(commercially  
available)  
OUT  
CAUTION:  
• Connect the unit directly to the TV. Do not connect the unit to a  
VCR, then connect the VCR to the TV. Copyright protection in the  
VCR could distort the picture playing on the unit.  
VCR  
T V  
This unit  
Note  
• Playback picture from DVD cannot be delivered through the Round Coaxial cable.  
The Round Coaxial cable is only for sending the antenna signal to the TV.  
• Connect the unit directly to the TV.  
If you attempt to view video on a TV connected via a VCR, the copy protection function will scramble the picture.  
VCR and Basic DVD Connection  
Available on DVD only  
DVD's Picture Quality  
Good picture  
Basic Audio  
Basic picture  
Best picture  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO IN  
T V  
AUDIO IN  
AV1  
Y
Y
S-VIDEO IN  
L
R
PB  
CB  
or  
PR  
CR  
Audio cable  
(commercially  
available)  
S-video cable  
(commercially  
available)  
Scart cable  
(commercially  
available)  
Component video cable  
(commercially available)  
This unit  
DVD  
DVD/VCR  
AV2 (DECODER)  
DVD  
DVD  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO S-VIDEO COMPONENT  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO S-VIDEO COMPONENT  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO S-VIDEO COMPONENT  
OUT OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
VIDEO OUT  
Y
Y
P
/CB  
B
P
/C
P
/CB  
B
L
L
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
AV1 (TV)  
/CR  
R
P
P
/CR  
R
/CR  
R
P
R
R
(Analogue) AUDIO OUT  
AV1 (TV)  
S-VIDEO OUT  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
* Only if your TV accepts an  
RGB video signal.  
14 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections  
Connecting to a TV (cont’d)  
Note  
• The unit is sending each video signals simultaneously. If you connected an S-VIDEO OUT and/or a COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT with the VIDEO OUT (SCART), make sure your TV’s input mode is set correctly according to the  
connection you made.  
• You will not be able to hear all of the sound being output by the unit if you use the Audio cables (commercially  
available) to a monaural TV that has only one Audio input jack.  
• Be sure that the colours of the jacks and plugs match up when connecting the cable.  
• If you want to listen to the audio through audio equipment, connect only the S-video or Component video cable to the TV.  
• The S-VIDEO OUT and COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks are only useful in DVD mode.  
• If your TV is compatible with 525 or 625 progressive scanning and you want to enjoy that high quality picture,  
you must connect the Component video cable to your TV’s component Video input jacks (Y/PR/PB) and select  
progressive scanning mode. To set the mode, set “Video Out” to “Component Progressive (P)” in the “Video” of the  
“Playback” menu so that “P.SCAN” will appear on the display of this unit. See pages 83-84 for more details.  
• If your TV is not compatible with progressive scanning, use this unit in interlace mode. Make sure that no “P.SCAN”  
is on the display of this unit. If so, set “Video Out” to “Component Interlace (I)” in the “Video” of the “Playback”  
menu so that “P.SCAN” on the display of this unit will disappear.  
• (Analogue) AUDIO OUT jacks and Scart terminal are not available on the DTS audio.  
Connecting to external equipment  
This unit has four input terminals, AV1 or AV2 on the rear panel and AV3 or AV4 on the front panel. Be sure that all the  
units are off before making connections.  
Recording from a DVD player, VCR or other Audio-Video equipment with a Scart terminal (AV2)  
AV output jack  
(Scart)  
Scart cable  
(commercially available)  
AV2 (DECODER)  
DVD/VCR  
DVD  
ANTENNA  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO S-VIDEO COMPONENT  
AV2 (DECODER)  
AUDIO OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
VIDEO OUT  
Y
IN  
P
/CB  
B
L
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
AV1 (TV)  
/CR  
R
P
R
OUT  
Note  
• If the external equipment connected to the Scart terminal (AV2) supplies control voltage to this unit via Pin 8 of the  
Scart cable, the display functions of the remote control cannot be seen on the TV. In this case, turn off the external  
equipment to prevent control voltage, or make sure to use a Scart cable without Pin 8 for this connection.  
• The AV2 (DECODER) connection is useful for playing back the picture only.  
Even if an external equipment such as a DVD player can be delivered an RGB signals and your TV accepts them, this  
unit only records a Composite video signal.  
Recording from a camcorder or other Audio-Video equipment with no Scart terminal (AV3 or AV4)  
Connect to VIDEO input jack by using an RCA Video cable or DV input jack by using DV cable. Those jacks are on the  
front panel.  
STOP  
PLAY  
STOP  
PLAY  
DV-IN  
(AV3) VIDEO L(MONO)-AUDIO-R  
DV-IN  
(AV3) VIDEO L(MONO)-AUDIO-R  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
AV3 (Front)  
AV4 (Front)  
Video cable  
DV cable  
Audio cable  
(commercially available)  
(commercially available)  
(commercially available)  
VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT  
DV OUT  
Note  
• If you prefer better picture quality for the recordings from the external equipment, DV connections such as AV4  
(front) is recommended.  
EN 15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections  
Connecting to an Audio System  
Playing Dolby Digital (5.1 channel audio),  
DTS or MPEG audio  
Connecting the unit to audio equipment provides normal Connecting an amplifier with a Dolby Digital/ DTS/ MPEG  
stereo sound, plus powerful stereo sound enhanced by audio digital surround processor to your unit's audio  
Dolby Digital 5.1 channel surround sound, DTS and MPEG digital jack provides richer and more powerful audio  
Playing 2 channel audio  
audio.  
play. This connection is not possible if the processor or  
amplifier to which you want to connect does not have an  
audio digital input jack.  
Dolby Digital decoder,  
DTS decoder, MPEG decoder,  
MD deck or DAT deck  
Stereo system  
AUDIO  
L
R
Digital audio  
input jacks  
Analogue audio  
input jacks  
Optical digital audio cable  
Coaxial digital  
audio cable  
Audio cable  
(commercially available)  
(commercially available)  
(commercially available)  
DVD  
DVD  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO S-VIDEO COMPONENT  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO S-VIDEO COMPONENT  
OUT OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
VIDEO OUT  
Y
This unit  
Y
P
P
/CB  
B
/CB  
B
L
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
(Analogue)  
AUDIO OUT  
P
P
/CR  
R
/CR  
R
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
R
SETUP > Playback > Audio >  
Digital Out >  
SETUP > Playback > Audio >  
Digital Out >  
Setting  
Setting  
Connection  
Connection  
Dolby Digital  
PCM  
MPEG  
PCM  
DTS  
OFF  
Dolby Digital  
MPEG  
DTS  
Connecting to Stereo System.  
Connecting to a Dolby  
Digital, DTS decoder or MPEG  
decoder for Dolby Digital, DTS  
or MPEG audio output.  
Connecting to the other  
equipment (an MD deck or  
DAT deck etc.) without Dolby  
Digital decoder.  
* To complete these settings, refer to pages 81-83.  
C Digital Connection to Audio Equipment or MD deck  
without a Dolby Digital Decoder  
Stream  
Stream  
ON  
• Audio CDs can be transferred digitally to other  
equipment such as an MD deck or DAT deck, play the  
disc as you would normally with the connection shown  
above, right. Audio CDs recorded in the DTS format  
cannot be transferred digitally or via analogue.  
• Some Audio CDs have a short silent section between  
musical tracks. When sound from discs such as these  
is digitally recorded by connecting the unit directly to  
a digital recorder (such as an MD deck or DAT deck),  
the music may be recorded continuously and track  
numbers may be lost.  
• DVDs recorded in Dolby Digital 5.1 channel surround  
sound, DTS or MPEG Audio cannot be connected  
digitally to external recording equipment such as an  
MD deck or DAT deck.  
It may be possible to record “Dolby Digital” or “MPEG”  
Audio via a digital connection if the unit output is set  
to “PCM” (see pages 81-83 “Digital Out”). Analogue  
recording is possible but not for DTS recorded audio.  
PCM  
PCM  
OFF  
* To complete these settings, refer to pages 81-83.  
C Optical cable (not supplied)  
• Optical cable (not supplied) may be damaged when  
bent at sharp angles. Ensure cables are coiled in loops  
with a diameter of 15cm or more when storing them.  
• Use a cable which is 3m or shorter.  
• Insert cable plugs firmly into the connectors when  
making connections.  
• If a plug has dust or is dirty, clean it with a soft cloth  
before inserting it into a connector.  
Note  
• The DVD AUDIO OUT and DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jacks  
are only useful in DVD mode.  
• The audio source on a disc in a Dolby Digital 5.1  
channel surround format cannot be recorded as  
digital sound by an MD or DAT deck.  
Note  
• Playing back a DVD using incorrect settings may  
generate noise distortion and may also damage the  
speakers.  
• By hooking this unit up to a Multi-channel Dolby  
Digital decoder, you can enjoy high-quality Dolby  
Digital 5.1 channel surround sound as heard in the  
movie theatres.  
• Playing back a DVD using incorrect settings may  
generate noise distortion and may also damage the  
speakers.  
• AUDIO OUT jacks are not available on the DTS audio.  
• By hooking this unit up to the DTS decoder, you can  
enjoy 5.1 channel surround system which reproduces  
the original sound as truthfully as possible. 5.1  
channel surround system is developed by the Digital  
Theater Systems, Inc.  
16 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Easy DVD recording  
The following will help you to understand easily how to record on DVD discs.  
Make sure batteries are in the remote control and you have connected this unit and the TV correctly.  
Step 1: Choose a disc type.  
There are several types of recordable DVD  
discs to choose from. Choose a recordable  
DVD disc type based on your playback /  
recording / editing needs. See “DVD disc  
types” at the bottom of this page for more  
information on the differences among  
various compatible media.  
Step 2: Insert a blank disc.  
Remote Control  
OPERATE  
Turn on the unit.  
DU
1
2
3
T-SET TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
ZOOM  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
DUBBING  
SETUP  
Select the DVD  
mode.  
T-SET TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
This unit can record on the following  
type of discs.  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
ZOOM  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
DUBBING  
Open the disc tray.  
SETUP  
T-SET TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
or  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
ZOOM  
Insert a recordable  
disc you wish to  
record.  
For example, when you want to record  
repeatedly on the same disc or when  
you want to edit the disc after record-  
ing, select the rewritable DVD-RW  
type disc.  
4
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
Close the disc tray.  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
5
T-SET TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
ZOOM  
When you want to save recordings  
without any alteration, a non-rewri-  
table DVD-R can be your choice.  
This operation  
may take a while  
to be recognised.  
Loading  
DVD disc types  
Format the disc  
: Most suitable.  
: Can be used.  
: Some functions are limited.  
: Cannot be used.  
Insert the disc in the unit.  
Then, format the disc from  
the Setup menu. Video  
format (Video mode) or  
Video recording format  
(VR mode) will be available  
depending on the inserted  
disc type.  
You want to  
Record TV programmes  
DVD-RW VR  
DVD-RW Video  
DVD-R Video  
Reuse by deleting unwanted contents  
Edit the contents  
Edit/Record from connected equipment  
Copy discs for distribution  
*1  
*1  
Playback on other DVD equipment  
Formatting is only neces-  
sary to prepare the disc  
for recording. Details are  
on pages 26-28.  
When you format a disc,  
the entire contents on that  
disc will be erased.  
• The unit automatically  
starts formatting when  
an unused disc is  
inserted.  
Features  
Recording  
Rewritable  
DVD-RW VR  
DVD-RW Video  
DVD-R Video  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
Can create chapters at fixed intervals (Automatically)  
Can create chapters wherever you like (Manually)  
Can record 16:9 size pictures  
Can record Copy-Once programmes  
Editing  
Can perform basic editing functions  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
Can perform advanced editing functions (Playlist edit)  
*1  
DVD-RW (VR mode) can only be played on DVD equipment that is VR compatible.  
Note  
For details of the above functions and implied restrictions, see the  
explanations inside this Operation Manual.  
EN 17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Easy DVD recording (cont’d)  
Step 3: Select the  
recording  
Step 4: Select the  
desired  
Step 5: Record to  
DVD discs.  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
mode.  
channel.  
T-SET TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
ENTER  
RETURN  
OPEN/CLOSE  
OPERATE  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
ZOOM  
SETUP  
EJECT  
DUBBING  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
1
2
3
TOP MENU  
RETURN  
MENU LIST  
PROG.  
T-SET TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
VCR  
DVD  
CM
ZOOM  
ENTER  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
SKIP  
TOP MENU  
RETURN  
MENU LIST  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
1
2
3
0
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
ENTER  
REV  
FWD  
DVD  
6
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
PLAY  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
7
8
9
1
2
3
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
PROG.  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
0
6
4
5
STOP  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
REV  
FWD  
7
8
9
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
SKIP  
PLAY  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
P08  
SP  
0:58  
I
Hint 1: Play back the recorded contents  
You can select the title you want to play back from a displayed menu and  
immediately start playback. Recorded  
Step 6: Stop the  
record.  
Start Rec.  
Stop/Start  
Stop Rec.  
contents are easily accessible, with simple  
procedure of choosing a title on a chapter  
on the menu screen.  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
Title 1  
Title 2  
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
What are titles and chapters?  
The contents of a DVD disc are generally  
divided into titles. Titles may be further  
divided into chapters.  
0
REV  
FWD  
Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 1 Chapter 2  
PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
STOP  
Hint 2: Edit the recorded disc  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
You will find editing discs is easy. This unit offers convenient editing  
functions which are possible only with DVD-RW/-R discs.  
Title List offers the following editing functions.  
• Putting names on titles  
• Setting pictures for thumbnails  
• Setting / clearing chapter marks  
• Deleting parts of titles or scenes  
(Possible editing functions depend on the recording format and editing method.)  
Original and Playlist (VR mode)  
Wait for a moment.  
90%  
Appears only DVD-RW in  
VR mode.  
You can edit the contents on a Playlist without changing the original  
recordings. A Playlist does not take up much disc space.  
What “Original” or “Playlist” is for?  
Throughout this Operation Manual, you will find Original and Playlist to refer  
to the original content and the edited version.  
Original content refers to what’s originally recorded on the disc.  
Playlist content refers to the edited version of the original content.  
Finalising a Disc  
• You need to record in Video mode and finalise the disc to play it back on  
other players.  
C
Once you finalise a disc recorded in Video mode, you cannot record or edit  
any information on the disc.  
This operation may  
take a while to be com-  
pleted.  
• Discs recorded in VR mode can still be edited after finalisation.  
18 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Channel setting  
The unit will start storing  
channels available in your area.  
Tuning of this unit to broadcast  
channels can be performed in  
two ways.  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
1
4
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
Auto Tuning  
P
01  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
Programme the tuner to scan  
only the channels you can  
receive in your area.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Auto Tuning Now  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
2
3
1
2
3
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
4
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
1
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
In stop mode, press [SETUP].  
Setup menu will appear.  
0
Wait for about 10 minutes to  
finish channel storing.  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
Setup  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
Required Setting  
Playback  
Display  
4
STOP  
Press [SETUP] to exit.  
You can select only the channels  
memorised in this unit by using  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
Recording  
Clock  
Channel  
Disc  
[PROG.  
/
].  
To select a channel  
You can select a channel using  
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
[PROG.  
/
], or directly enter  
2
the channel using [the Number  
Select “Channel” using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
buttons] on the remote control.  
To cancel auto tuning  
Press [RETURN ] or [SETUP]  
during scanning.  
Note  
3
• The selection will be affected  
by how you receive TV  
Select “Auto Tuning” using  
[Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
channels in your local area.  
• If the auto tuning is cancelled  
during scanning, some  
channels not yet tuned may  
not be received.  
• You cannot change the  
channel when either VCR or  
DVD is in any recording mode  
(normal recording, One-touch  
Timer Recording or timer  
recording).  
EN 19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Channel setting (cont’d)  
Manual Tuning  
Manually tune each channel.  
• You can select a desired  
channel number using [the  
Number buttons]. Refer to the  
following Channel Plan table  
and press the three digits to  
select the channel number.  
(To select channel 4, press  
[0] first and then press [0]  
and [4]. Or press [4] and then  
“– – 4” appears and wait for 2  
seconds.)  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
1
8
1
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
In stop mode, press [SETUP].  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
ENTER  
RETURN  
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
1
2
3
PROG.  
Select “Channel” using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
5
7
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
3
REV  
FWD  
• If this is the channel you want,  
press [Cursor {].  
PLAY  
Select “Manual Tuning” using  
[Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
STOP  
Channel Plan in Australia  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
CH. Indication  
TV Channel  
0 - 13  
28 - 69  
9A  
Manual Tuning  
VCR DVD  
00 - 13  
28 - 69  
84  
Position  
Channel  
Decoder  
Skip  
P01  
2
OFF  
ON  
85  
5A  
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
Channel Plan in New Zealand  
CH. Indication  
00 - 02  
06 - 09  
10 - 12  
21 - 74  
84  
TV Channel  
1 - 3  
4
4 - 7  
Select “Position” using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [Cursor B].  
“P01” is highlighted.  
9 - 11  
21 - 69  
8
5
This unit can receive the Hyper  
and Oscar frequency bands.  
Select the position number you  
wish to use using [the Number  
buttons] or [Cursor K / L], then  
press [Cursor {].  
• If “Skip” is set to “ON,” select  
“Skip” using [Cursor K / L],  
then press [Cursor B]. Select  
“OFF” using [Cursor K / L],  
then press [Cursor {].  
You can select position numbers  
01 to 99.  
• If you want to decode  
scrambled signals, select  
“Decoder” using [Cursor K / L],  
then press [Cursor B]. Select  
“ON” using [Cursor K / L], then  
press [Cursor {].  
• To store another channel,  
repeat steps 4 to 7.  
6
Select “Channel” using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [Cursor B].  
7
Press [Cursor K / L] to start  
scanning.  
• The tuner will begin to search  
up or down automatically.  
When a channel is found, the  
unit will stop searching and the  
picture will appear on the TV  
screen.  
8
After completion, press  
[SETUP] to exit.  
20 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Channel setting (cont’d)  
To select a channel  
Notes on using [the Number buttons]:  
• Enter channel numbers as a two-digit number for the quickest  
result. For example, to select channel 6, press [0] and [6]. If you only  
press [6], channel 6 will be selected after 2 seconds. You can only  
select channels 1 to 99.  
• You can select the external input mode “AV1”, “AV2”, or “AV3”.  
• To select the “AV1”, “AV2”, or “AV3”, press [0], [0], [1] or [0], [0], [2]  
or [0], [0], [3] accordingly or use [PROG.  
/
].  
• To select the external input mode “AV4” for DV connection, you  
must use [PROG. ].  
/
To skip a Preset channel  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
You can set the unit to skip  
channels you can no longer  
receive or seldom watch when  
you access channels using  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
6
4
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
Select “Skip” using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [Cursor B].  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
[PROG.  
/
].  
ENTER  
RETURN  
2
3
4
5
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
1
2
3
PROG.  
5
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
1
6
4
5
Select “ON” using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [Cursor {].  
• To skip another channel,  
repeat steps 2 to 5.  
3
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
Follow the steps 1 to 3 in  
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
“Manual Tuning” on page 20.  
0
REV  
FWD  
2
PLAY  
Select “Position” using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [Cursor B].  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
STOP  
6
Press [SETUP] to exit.  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
3
Select the position number you  
wish to skip using [the Number  
buttons] or [Cursor K / L], then  
press [Cursor {].  
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
Move  
You can replace two channels.  
You cannot select a position  
number where “– – –” appears  
next to the number, because  
“Skip” is set to “ON” for that  
position number.  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
1
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
1
6
In stop mode, press [SETUP].  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
2
5
ENTER  
RETURN  
Select “Channel” using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
Move the channel to another  
position number using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
• To move another channel,  
repeat steps 3 to 5.  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
3
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
Select “Move” using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
6
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
Press [SETUP] to exit.  
4
STOP  
Select the position number of  
which you want to change the  
channel using [Cursor K / L],  
then press [ENTER].  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
EN 21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Setting the clock  
Clock Setting  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
1
5
SETUP  
DUBBING  
In stop mode, press [SETUP].  
Enter the date (day / month /  
year) using [Cursor K / L].  
Press [Cursor B] to move the  
cursor to the next field. If you  
wish to go back to the previous  
field, press [Cursor {].  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
1
7
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
2
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
Select “Clock” using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
ENTER  
RETURN  
2
3
4
5
6
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
1
2
3
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
3
6
4
5
6
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
Select “Clock Setting” using  
[Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
7
8
9
SKIP  
Enter the time (hour / minute)  
using [Cursor K / L], then  
press [ENTER].  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
REV  
FWD  
Clock Setting  
VCR DVD  
PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
VCR DVD  
REC/OTR  
Clock Setting  
STOP  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
--  
/
-- / ---- ( --- )  
-- : --  
02 / 01 / 2006(MON)  
12: 00  
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
4
The clock will start.  
Press [ENTER] again.  
• Although seconds are not  
displayed, they will be counted  
from zero.  
Default date will appear.  
Clock Setting  
VCR DVD  
7
Press [SETUP] to exit.  
Note  
01 / 01 / 2006(SUN)  
0 : 00  
• Your clock setting will be lost if  
either there is a power failure  
or the unit is unplugged for  
more than 1 hour.  
22 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Selecting the On-Screen Display (OSD) language  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
1
4
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
1
5
In stop mode, press [SETUP].  
Select the appropriate OSD  
language using [Cursor K / L],  
then press [ENTER].  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
2
ENTER  
RETURN  
Select “Display” using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
5
2
3
4
1
2
3
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
Press [SETUP] to exit.  
6
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
SKIP  
3
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
Select “OSD Language” using  
[Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
STOP  
OSD Language  
VCR DVD  
English  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
Français  
Español  
Deutsch  
Italiano  
Svenska  
Nederlands  
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
Selecting the TV aspect ratio  
You can select the TV aspect  
ratio to match the format of the  
programme you are playing back  
with the unit and that of your TV  
screen (4:3 standard or 16:9 wide  
screen TV).  
3
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
Select “TV Aspect” using  
[Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
1
5
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
TV Aspect  
DVD  
4:3 Letter Box  
4:3 Pan & Scan  
16:9 Wide  
ENTER  
RETURN  
1
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
2
3
4
In stop mode, press [SETUP].  
1
2
3
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
2
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
Select “Required Setting”  
using [Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
4
Required Setting menu will  
appear.  
STOP  
Select the desired option using  
[Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
DVD  
Required Setting  
TV Aspect  
4:3 Letter Box  
5
Note  
Press [SETUP] to exit.  
If you have a standard TV:  
• Select “4:3 Letter Box” for a  
full width picture with black  
bars at the top and bottom.  
• Select “4:3 Pan & Scan” for a  
full height picture with both  
sides trimmed.  
If you have a wide screen TV:  
• Select “16:9 Wide”.  
EN 23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
Information on DVD recording  
Type of discs  
Disc type  
Disc format  
Video mode  
Functions  
Playing back,  
Limited recording,  
Limited editing  
This unit can record on DVD-RW and DVD-R. You  
can record on DVD-R only once. On DVD-RW, you  
can record and erase many times. It is possible to  
record on DVD-R only in Video mode. DVD-RW can  
record in the format you select from Video mode  
or VR mode.  
VR mode  
Playing back,  
DVD-RW  
Recording,  
Original / Playlist editing  
Video mode  
Playing back,  
Limited recording,  
Limited editing  
Logo  
Attributes  
4.7  
DVD-R  
8cm / 12cm, single-sided, single layer disc  
Max. recording time (10H mode, approx.):  
600 minutes (4.7GB) (for 12cm)  
Recording mode  
DVD-RW  
You can select a recording mode from 6 options.  
The recording time will vary depending on the  
recording mode you select as follows.  
Discs recorded in SLP or SEP on this unit may  
not be played back on other DVD recorders or  
DVD players.  
180 minutes (1.4GB) (for 8cm)  
DVD-R  
If you want to record repeatedly on the same disc,  
or if you want to edit the disc after recording, use a  
rewritable DVD-RW type disc.  
If you want to save recordings without any  
alteration, use a non-rewritable DVD-R type disc.  
Recording time  
12cm 8cm  
Video/  
Sound Quality  
Recording mode  
XP  
SP  
LP  
EP  
SLP  
SEP  
60 min 18 min  
120 min 36 min  
240 min 72 min  
360 min 108 min  
480 min 144 min  
600 min 180 min  
Recordable discs  
• Discs that should or should not be used with this  
recorder:  
DVD-R 8x can be used.  
DVD-RW 4x can be used, 6x may result in a Rec  
error.  
• We strongly recommend for good recording  
quality:  
Verbatim DVD-R 8x  
Verbatim DVD-RW 2x  
• This table is intended for a standard new single  
sided 12cm / 8cm disc. The recording times are  
estimates and actual recording time may differ.  
• The audio and video quality becomes poorer as  
the recording time gets longer.  
Restrictions on recording  
Video mode and VR (Video Recording) mode  
Video mode is the same recording format as used  
on the pre-recorded DVD-Videos you purchase  
in local shops, so you can play back the discs  
recorded in this format in most DVD players.  
You will need to finalise such discs (see pages  
40-41) before playing them back in other DVD  
players. Unless finalised, you can record additional  
materials or edit discs recorded in Video mode  
with this unit.  
VR (Video Recording) mode is a basic recording  
format for DVD-RW discs. You can record and  
edit material repeatedly. It is impossible to record  
additional materials on a disc formatted in VR  
mode and already recorded in another video  
system other than PAL, such as NTSC.  
You cannot record copy-protected video using this  
unit. Copy-protected video includes DVD-Videos  
and some satellite broadcasts.  
If copy-protected material is detected, recording  
will pause or stop automatically and an error  
message appears on the screen.  
You can only record “Copy-once only” video  
using a DVD-RW disc in VR mode with Content  
Protection for Recordable Media (CPRM).  
When recording a TV broadcast or an external  
input, you can display copy control information on  
the screen.  
CPRM is a scrambling copy protection system  
for the protection of “copy-once” broadcast  
programmes. This unit is CPRM compatible, which  
means that you can record copy-once broadcast  
programmes, but you cannot then make a copy  
of those recordings. CPRM recordings can only be  
played back on DVD players that are specifically  
compatible with CPRM.  
DVD players bearing the  
logo are capable  
of playing back DVD-RW discs recorded in VR  
mode.  
24 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
Information on DVD recording (cont’d)  
After finalising  
Information on copy control  
• After DVD-R discs are finalised:  
Some satellite broadcasts include copy-protected  
information. If you wish to record them, refer to  
the following.  
- A Title menu is created automatically.  
- Undo finalising is not possible.  
- Additional recording or editing is not possible.  
• After DVD-RW (Video mode) discs are finalised:  
- A Title menu is created automatically.  
- Undo finalising is possible. (See page 41.)  
- Additional recording or editing is possible if  
you undo finalise. (See page 41.)  
• After DVD-RW (VR mode) discs are finalised:  
- A Title menu is not created.  
- Undo finalising is possible. (See page 41.)  
- Additional recording or editing is possible even  
without undo finalising.  
Copy-  
Disc type / format  
Copy-free Copy-once  
prohibited  
ver.1.1, 1.2  
ver.1.1/ x2 CPRM compatible  
ver.1.2/ x4 CPRM compatible  
ver.1.1, 1.2  
ver.1.1/ x2 CPRM compatible  
ver.1.2/ x4 CPRM compatible  
ver.2.0  
Usable discs  
ver.2.0/ x4  
ver.2.0/ x8  
: Most suitable,  
: Can be used,  
__  
: Some functions are limited,  
: Cannot be used.  
DVD-RW  
Recordable  
Not Recordable  
Applications  
DVD-R  
VR  
VIDEO  
Record TV programmes  
Reuse by deleting the current  
contents  
Edit the contents  
Edit / Record from external  
equipment  
Note  
• This unit cannot record on CD-RW or CD-R discs.  
• DVD-RW/-R and CD-RW/-R discs recorded on  
a personal computer or a DVD or CD recorder  
may not be played back if the disc is damaged  
or dirty or if there is condensation on the  
player’s lens.  
__  
Copy discs for distribution  
*
*
• If you record a disc using a personal computer,  
even if it is recorded in a compatible format, it  
may not be played back because of the settings  
of the application software used to create the  
disc. (Check with the software publisher for  
more detailed information.)  
• Discs recorded in Video mode on this unit  
cannot record additional information using  
other DVD recorders.  
• It is not possible to use a DVD-RW disc  
formatted with this unit on other DVD recorder  
unless the content of the disc was also  
recorded with this unit.  
• Since recording is performed using the Variable  
Bit Rate (VBR) method, the actual remaining  
time for recording may be a little shorter than  
the remaining time displayed on the OSD,  
depending on the picture you are recording.  
Playback on other DVD  
equipment  
Features  
Rewritable  
Can create chapters at fixed  
intervals (Automatically)  
Can create chapters  
wherever you like (Manually)  
Can record 16:9 size pictures  
Can record Copy-Once  
programmes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
No  
Can perform basic editing  
functions  
Can perform advanced  
editing functions (Playlist edit)  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
* You can only play back DVD-RW disc recorded in  
VR mode on VR-compatible discs.  
Note  
• For details of the above functions and  
restrictions, see the further explanations in this  
Operation Manual.  
Making discs playable in other DVD  
players (Finalise)  
After recording, you must finalise the disc to play it  
back in other players. (See page 40.)  
You cannot finalise discs in other DVD recorders.  
EN 25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
Formatting a disc  
Choosing the recording format of a brand-new DVD-RW disc  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
5
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
When inserting a brand-new disc,  
1
6
Select “Video mode” or “VR  
VCR  
DVD  
the unit automatically starts to  
CM SKIP  
mode” using [Cursor K / L],  
then press [ENTER].  
initialise the disc. You can also  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
manually format a DVD-RW disc  
ENTER  
RETURN  
once it has been used.  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
Press [SETUP] to exit.  
6
4
5
1
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
In stop mode, press [SETUP].  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
7
REV  
FWD  
Insert a brand-new disc.  
2
PLAY  
Formatting will start.  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
Select “Disc” using [Cursor  
REC/OTR  
STOP  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
Disc menu will appear.  
Disc  
Format  
Finalise  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
Formatting  
90%  
8
Formatting is completed.  
“100%” is indicated.  
3
Select “Format” using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
Format menu will appear.  
Format  
Start  
Format Mode  
Video mode  
Note  
• The recording format setting  
is effective only for DVD-RW  
discs. You cannot change the  
recording format for a DVD-R  
disc. DVD-R discs are always  
in Video mode.  
• You cannot mix two formats  
on one DVD-RW disc. If  
you insert a disc that has  
been recorded before, the  
recording format cannot be  
changed even if you change  
it in the Setup menu.  
4
Select “Format Mode” using  
[Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
Format - Format Mode  
Video mode  
VR mode  
• The unit is not compatible  
with DVD+RW/+R discs. If  
a brand-new DVD+RW or  
DVD+R disc is inserted, the  
error message (“Disc Error”)  
will appear.  
Video mode  
DVD Player Compatibility mode.  
VR mode  
Editing possibility mode.  
26 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
Formatting a disc (cont’d)  
Setting Auto Chapter  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
3
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
1
5
Select “Auto Chapter” using  
[Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
The unit inserts a chapter mark  
periodically (every 10 minutes by  
default) during recording. Using  
the Auto Chapter menu, you can  
set this function off or change the  
time period.  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Auto Chapter  
DVD  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
OFF  
2
3
4
1
2
3
PROG.  
5 minutes  
10 minutes  
15 minutes  
30 minutes  
60 minutes  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
1
0
In stop mode, press [SETUP].  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
2
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
STOP  
Select “Recording” using  
[Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
4
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
If you wish to set “Auto  
Chapter” off, select “OFF”  
DVD  
Recording  
using [Cursor K / L], then press  
Auto Chapter  
10 minutes  
[ENTER].  
Recording Audio Select (XP)  
Auto Finalise  
Dolby Digital  
OFF  
If you wish to change the time  
period for Auto Chapter, select  
the required time period using  
[Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
Satellite Link  
Bilingual Recording Audio  
External Input Audio  
Dubbing Mode  
Main  
Stereo  
VCR DVD  
Note  
• You cannot set or clear  
chapter marks on DVD-R discs  
manually.  
5
Press [SETUP] to exit.  
Recording Audio Select (XP)  
OPEN/CLOSE  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
EJECT  
DUBBING  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
1
5
4
You can enjoy high quality sound  
recording. This function works  
only when the recording mode is  
set at XP.  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
Select “PCM” or “Dolby Digital”  
using [Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
ENTER  
RETURN  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
2
3
4
PCM:  
1
2
3
PROG.  
1
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
Records PCM audio for the best  
quality sound.  
6
4
5
In stop mode, press [SETUP].  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
2
Dolby Digital:  
Records Dolby Digital audio for  
good quality sound.  
REV  
FWD  
Select “Recording” using  
[Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
STOP  
5
3
Press [SETUP] to exit.  
Note  
Select “Recording Audio Select  
(XP)” using [Cursor K / L], then  
press [ENTER].  
• “PCM” stands for Pulse Code  
Modulation. It changes  
analogue sound to digital  
sound without compressing  
audio data.  
Recording Audio Select (XP)  
DVD  
PCM  
• When the recording mode is  
set at other than XP, the unit  
Dolby Digital  
records “Dolby Digital” audio  
automatically even if you  
selected “PCM”.  
The default is “Dolby Digital”.  
EN 27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
Formatting a disc (cont’d)  
Reformatting a disc manually  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
4
If you are using a DVD-RW disc,  
you can format the disc by  
performing “Format”. By default  
it will be in Video mode. You can  
change this to VR mode using the  
Setup menu.  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
Select “Start” using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
1
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
Format  
Start  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Format mode  
Video mode  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
PROG.  
Are you sure?  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
Note  
6
4
5
Yes  
No  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
• When you reformat the disc,  
the contents of the disc are  
erased.  
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
REV  
FWD  
• Make sure that the recording  
format is set to the desired  
mode. (See steps 1 to 6 in  
“Choosing the recording  
format of a brand-new DVD-  
RW disc” on page 26.)  
PLAY  
A popup window will appear and  
prompt you to confirm.  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
STOP  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
5
Select “Yes” using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
Formatting will start.  
If you want to cancel formatting,  
select “No”.  
Insert a recordable disc.  
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
1
In stop mode, press [SETUP].  
2
Select “Disc” using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
Disc  
Formatting  
90%  
Format  
Finalise  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
6
Formatting is completed.  
“100%” is indicated.  
3
Select “Format” using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
Format  
Start  
Formatting  
100%  
Format Mode  
Video mode  
Note  
• It is not possible to use a disc  
formatted with this unit on  
other DVD recorder. When  
you use a disc with another  
DVD recorder, format a disc  
using that DVD recorder.  
28 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
Selecting the Sound mode  
This unit can receive bilingual broadcasts.  
• During reception of bilingual broadcasts  
You can switch between modes by pressing  
[AUDIO] on the remote control. Each mode is  
indicated on the TV screen as follows.  
Display on the  
TV screen  
Mode  
Audio output  
Main  
Sub  
Main audio from both speakers  
Sub audio from both speakers  
Main  
Sub  
• Main audio from the left speaker  
• Sub audio from the right speaker  
Main / Sub  
Main / Sub  
Setting External Input Audio  
OPEN/CLOSE  
OPERATE  
DUBBING  
SETUP  
EJECT  
When the external input audio  
is a bilingual broadcast, you can  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
1
5
3
choose “Stereo” or “Bilingual” to  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
Select “External Input Audio”  
using [Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
record on a DVD.  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
ENTER  
RETURN  
1
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
External Input Audio  
VCR DVD  
2
3
4
1
2
3
PROG.  
In stop mode, press [SETUP].  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
Stereo  
6
4
5
Bilingual  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
2
0
Select “Recording” using  
[Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
STOP  
DVD  
Recording  
Auto Chapter  
10 minutes  
Recording Audio Select (XP)  
Auto Finalise  
Dolby Digital  
OFF  
Note  
4
• If you select “Stereo”:  
Satellite Link  
Select “Stereo” or “Bilingual”  
using [Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
Bilingual Recording Audio  
External Input Audio  
Dubbing Mode  
Main  
The audio will be recorded as  
“stereo audio”.  
• If you select “Bilingual”:  
The audio will be recorded  
as “bilingual audio” (see next  
section for more detail).  
Stereo  
VCR DVD  
5
Press [SETUP] to exit.  
Setting Bilingual Recording Audio  
You can select either “Main” or  
OPEN/CLOSE  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
EJECT  
DUBBING  
“Sub” audio to record a bilingual  
3
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
1
5
broadcast in Video mode.  
Select “Bilingual Recording  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
Audio” using [Cursor K / L],  
then press [ENTER].  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
1
ENTER  
RETURN  
In stop mode, press [SETUP].  
Bilingual Recording Audio  
DVD  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
Main  
Sub  
2
3
4
1
2
3
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
2
6
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
Select “Recording” using  
[Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
Note  
• If you are recording onto a  
VR mode disc, both “Main”  
and “Sub” will be recorded  
regardless of your setting  
here. And when you play  
back, you can choose  
4
Select “Main” or “Sub” using  
[Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
either audio format or a  
combination of both as your  
playback audio.  
5
Press [SETUP] to exit.  
EN 29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
Basic recording / One-touch Timer Recording (OTR)  
To pause the recording, press  
[PAUSE F]. Press [PAUSE F]  
or [DVD REC/OTR I] again to  
restart the recording.  
4
Follow the steps below to record  
a TV programme.  
Press [OPEN/CLOSE EJECT  
close the disc tray.  
A
] to  
VCR  
D
V
D
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
8
C
V
T
AD  
5
Press [STOP C] to stop the  
Select the recording mode  
using [REC MODE].  
(See page 24.)  
recording.  
1
Press [ OPERATE] to turn on  
the unit.  
This operation may take a  
few moments to complete.  
Turn on the TV and be sure to  
select the input to which the unit  
is connected.  
SP  
0:58  
OPEN/CLOSE  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
EJECT  
DUBBING  
1
5
6
2
4
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
6
2
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
Select the desired channel to  
Press [OPEN/CLOSE EJECT A] to  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
record using [PROG.  
/
] or  
open the disc tray.  
[the Number buttons].  
ENTER  
RETURN  
3
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
1
2
3
Place the disc on the disc tray  
with its label facing up. Be sure  
to align the disc with the disc  
tray guide.  
P08  
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
7
0
Press [DVD REC/OTR I] to start  
recording.  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
The “I” mark will be displayed  
for 5 seconds.  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
STOP  
7
Disc  
tray  
guide  
8
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
I
To set the One-touch Timer Recording (OTR)  
This is a simple way to set the recording time in blocks of 30 minutes.  
I
0:30  
At step 7, press [DVD REC/OTR I] repeatedly until the desired record-  
ing time (30 minutes to 8 hours) appears on the TV screen.  
One-touch Timer Recording will start.  
0:30  
(Normal Recording)  
1:00  
• To change the recording length during one-touch timer recording,  
press [DVD REC/OTR I] repeatedly until the desired length appears.  
• To cancel One-touch Timer Recording within the specified time, press  
[STOP C].  
• The remaining recording time will be displayed on the front panel display  
during One-touch Timer Recording. Press [DISPLAY] to see it on the TV screen.  
8:00  
7:30  
• Unlike the timer recording, you can perform the following operations during One-touch Timer Recording.  
- Turning off the power. - Using [DVD REC/OTR I] or [STOP C].  
You cannot use the pause function during One-touch Timer Recording.  
• If DVD One-touch Timer Recording is completed during VCR playback or recording, the DVD will be in  
stop mode and the VCR keeps the current mode.  
• When One-touch Timer Recording is finished and the power is turned off, the unit will switch to the timer-  
standby mode automatically if a timer recording has been programmed. Press [T-SET] to cancel the timer-  
standby mode to use the unit continuously.  
Note  
• You can change the channel while in the REC pause mode when basic recording.  
• You cannot change the recording mode while in the REC or REC pause mode.  
• If the clock is not set, the date and time space next to title names in the Original or Playlist will be blank.  
• The unit will be turned off automatically under the following conditions.  
- No space remains on the disc. - If a power failure occurs.  
• If you want to monitor the programme that you are recording, make sure the device such as Set-top Box  
is turned off when it is connected to AV2.  
• Even if the broadcasting you are recording is in the SECAM system, this unit automatically converts it to  
the PAL system when recording.  
30 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
Timer Recording  
4
8
Enter the time to start and to  
end using [Cursor K / L], then  
press [Cursor B].  
Press [ENTER] when all informa-  
tion required is entered.  
Your programme setting is  
stored.  
You can set the unit to record up  
to 8 programmes, up to a month  
in advance. Daily or weekly  
programme recordings are also  
available.  
• Be sure to set the clock before  
entering a timer programming.  
Timer Programming  
VCR DVD  
• To set another programme,  
repeat steps 2 to 8.  
DVD  
VCR  
Date  
1. 01/01 12:00  
2.  
Start  
End  
--:--  
CH  
Mode  
P01  
-
-
-
• To exit, press [TIMER PROG.].  
• If the recording times of two  
or more programmes overlap,  
“Overlap” and overlapped  
programme numbers are  
displayed. (See pages 32-33.)  
5
Select the channel number to  
record using [Cursor K / L],  
then press [Cursor B].  
Insert a recordable disc or a  
tape with a record tab.  
Timer Programming  
VCR DVD  
1
DVD  
VCR  
9
The  
Date  
1. 01/01 12:00  
2.  
Start  
End  
CH  
Mode  
In stop mode, press  
[TIMER PROG.].  
13:00 P01  
Press [T-SET].  
-
-
-
icon will appear on the  
Timer Programming list will appear.  
To record from the external input,  
select “AV1”, “AV2”, or “AV3”.  
front panel display and the unit  
enters to the timer-standby  
mode.  
Timer Programming  
VCR DVD  
DVD  
VCR  
Date Start End  
CH  
Mode  
1.  
2.  
-
-
-
-
-
-
6
Select the recording media  
(“DVD” or “VCR”) using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [Cursor B].  
OPEN/CLOSE  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
EJECT  
DUBBING  
1
8
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
2
9
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
Select a programme that is not  
set using [Cursor K / L], then  
press [ENTER].  
Timer Programming  
VCR DVD  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
DVD  
Date  
1. 01/01 12:00  
2.  
Start  
End  
CH  
Mode  
VCR  
13:00 P01  
DVD  
ENTER  
RETURN  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
-
-
-
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
1
2
3
PROG.  
3
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
7
6
4
5
Enter the date using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [Cursor B].  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
Select the recording mode using  
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
[Cursor K / L]. (See page 24.)  
0
Timer Programming  
VCR DVD  
REV  
FWD  
Timer Programming  
VCR DVD  
DVD  
VCR  
Date  
Start  
--:--  
End  
--:--  
CH  
Mode  
DVD  
PLAY  
Date  
1. 01/01 12:00  
2.  
Start  
End  
CH  
Mode  
XP  
1. 01/01  
P01  
VCR  
13:00 P01  
DVD  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
2.  
-
-
-
REC/OTR  
-
-
-
STOP  
Each time you press [Cursor L]  
at the current date, the timer  
recording date will change as  
follows.  
Note  
• If you have not set the clock, the clock setting window will appear  
instead of the Timer Programming list. Continue from step 4 in “Clock  
Setting” on page 22 before programming the timer.  
e.g., 1st January  
01/01  
• Press [Cursor { / B] to move the cursor in the Timer Programming list.  
• If a basic recording or One-touch Timer Recording is in progress on  
one component (e.g. VCR) and the timer recording set for the other  
component (e.g. DVD) is about to begin, the unit automatically  
switches to the programmed channel for timer recording 2 minutes  
before the programmed starting time, and the recording in progress  
(for VCR) will be cancelled UNLESS their recording channels are the  
same. If their recording channels are the same, the timer recording  
will start without cancelling the recording currently in progress. In this  
case, the recording of the same channel will be made on both DVD  
and VCR.  
Daily  
M-F (Mon.-Fri.)  
W-SAT  
W-FRI  
W-SUN  
31/01  
• Cancel the timer-standby mode by pressing [T-SET] before operation  
for either DVD or VCR. When finished operating, press [T-SET] to  
resume the timer-standby mode.  
• In the timer-standby mode, you can turn on the power and use the  
component (VCR or DVD) which is not currently timer-programmed.  
EN 31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
Timer Recording (cont’d)  
Checking, cancelling, or correcting the timer  
programming information  
In the following example, No.  
5 timer programming overlaps  
on No. 1 and No. 6 timer  
programmes. In such a case, you  
should correct the programme  
time to clear the overlap.  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
3
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
2
5
6
1
6
Check the information on the  
list you will need.  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
ENTER  
RETURN  
4
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
To clear the timer program-  
ming, select the desired pro-  
gramme using [Cursor K / L],  
then press [CLEAR/C-RESET].  
Timer Programming  
VCR DVD  
1
2
3
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
DVD  
Date  
Start  
End  
CH  
Mode  
XP  
6
4
5
VCR  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
1. 01/01 12:00  
13:00 P01  
DVD  
7
8
9
2.  
3.  
4.  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
Overlap  
0
No.1  
6
To correct the timer program-  
ming  
1)Select the desired programme  
using [Cursor K / L], then  
press [ENTER].  
4
REV  
FWD  
5. 01/01 12:30  
6. 01/01 13:45  
14:00 P02  
21:00 P12  
DVD  
DVD  
SP  
PLAY  
SEP  
7.  
8.  
-
-
-
-
-
-
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
STOP  
2)Correct the timer programming  
using [Cursor K / L / { / B].  
3)Press [ENTER] again.  
Note  
1
Press [T-SET] so that the  
• If a timer recording is  
icon disappears from the front  
panel display.  
proceeding, that programme  
is highlighted in red. In such  
a case, you cannot select any  
other programmes.  
5
Press [TIMER PROG.] to exit.  
2
Press [TIMER PROG.].  
Timer Programming list will  
appear.  
• When you check the timer  
programming in progress  
by pressing [TIMER PROG.]  
during operations of the  
component (VCR or DVD)  
which is not currently used  
for the timer recording,  
the programme will not be  
highlighted. In this case,  
you cannot select other  
programmings.  
6
Press [T-SET] to return to the  
timer-standby mode.  
Timer Programming  
VCR DVD  
To check the timer program-  
ming in process  
Press [TIMER PROG.].  
DVD  
VCR  
Date  
Start  
End  
CH  
Mode  
XP  
1. 01/01 12:00  
13:00 P01  
DVD  
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
6.  
7.  
8.  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
To stop the timer recording in progress  
Note  
[STOP C] on the remote  
control is not effective.  
Press [STOP C] to stop the disc recording or [STOP C/EJECT A] to  
stop the tape recording on the front panel of the unit.  
If the timer programming did not complete correctly  
The error number appears on the  
Timer Programming list.  
The error numbers indicate:  
VCR DVD  
Timer Programming  
E1-22  
Recording error  
E34  
No space for Control information  
PCA (Power Calibration Area) full  
Already finalised Video format disc  
DVD  
Date  
Start  
End  
CH  
Mode  
E1  
E37-39  
VCR  
E35  
E36  
E40  
01/01 12:00  
13:00 P01  
DVD  
*
E23-24 Unrecordable disc  
E25  
2.  
-
-
-
-
-
-
3.  
• Copy prohibited programme  
• Cannot record because of the  
NTSC / PAL-60 signal is received.  
• There are some unrecorded  
parts due the overlapped timer  
programmes.  
• Recording did not start at the  
start time.  
• There is no tape in the cassette  
compartment.  
• Tape recording reaches to  
the tape end during timer  
recording.  
The error programme will be  
displayed in grey with an asterisk  
and have an error number.  
The error programme will be  
deleted once you check the error  
in the programme list, or once  
you cancel the timer-standby  
mode and re-enter it.  
E26-28 Copy prohibited programme  
E29  
E30  
E31  
Disc protected  
Disc full  
Already recorded 99 titles (Video  
mode)  
E32  
E33  
Already recorded 99 titles (VR  
mode)  
E41  
E42  
Power failure  
No disc  
Press [CLEAR/C-RESET] to erase  
the selected programme.  
Already recorded 999 chapters  
32 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
Timer Recording (cont’d)  
Hints for Timer Recording  
• If there is a power failure or the unit is unplugged for  
more than 1 hour, the clock setting and all timer settings  
will be lost.  
• If there is no disc or an unrecordable disc in the tray, the  
icon will flash and the timer recording will not occur.  
Insert a recordable disc.  
• You cannot make any DVD operation during DVD timer  
recording.  
• You cannot make any VCR operation during VCR timer  
recording.  
• If the Start and End times are same, the length of the  
recording will be set for 24 hours. If the disc or tape  
becomes full during recording, the unit will turn itself  
off. To continue recording, press [T-SET] to cancel the  
timer-standby mode, insert a recordable disc or tape and  
press [T-SET] again.  
• If two or more programmes overlap, “Overlap” and the  
overlapped programme number will appear on the  
display.  
• If the Start time is earlier and the End time is later than  
the current time, the recording will start immediately  
after you press [T-SET].  
• If a videotape ends during the timer recording, the unit  
will automatically stop, eject the videotape, and turn  
itself off. To continue recording, insert a recordable tape.  
• If there is no tape or a tape with a record tab is not in  
the cassette compartment, the VCR indicator on the  
front panel flashes and the timer recording cannot be  
performed. Please insert a recordable tape.  
• When all timer recordings are complete, the  
icon  
flashes. To play back or eject the recorded disc, press  
[T-SET], and then press [PLAY B] or [OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT A].  
• The timer recording cannot be performed in DVD and  
VCR at the same time. If you set two programmings with  
the same channel and time both in DVD and VCR, the  
programming that has priority will be recorded.  
Priority of overlapped settings  
The unit records programmes according to prior ity if the timer programmes overlap.  
If the starting time is same:  
• The timer programming set first (PROG. 1) has  
priority.  
If the recording time is partially overlapped:  
• The timer programming with the earlier start  
time (PROG. 2) has priority. PROG. 1 will start after  
PROG. 2 recording is completed.  
PROG. 1  
PROG. 2  
PROG. 1  
PROG. 2  
Actual  
Actual  
PROG. 2  
PROG. 1  
recording  
PROG. 1  
PROG. 2  
recording  
Additional 30 seconds (at the most) are cut off.  
Additional 30 seconds (at the most) are cut off.  
PROG. 2 recording will start after PROG. 1 recording  
is completed.  
If the recording time entirely overlaps:  
• The shorter timer programming (PROG. 1) is not  
recorded.  
If programming has been made at the end of  
the programming (PROG. 1) currently being  
recorded:  
• The timer programming set first (PROG. 2) has  
priority. PROG. 3 will not be recorded.  
PROG. 1  
PROG. 2  
Actual  
recording  
PROG. 2  
PROG. 1  
PROG. 2  
PROG. 3  
Actual  
recording  
PROG. 1  
PROG. 2  
Additional 30 seconds (at the most) are cut off.  
PROG. 2 recording will start after PROG. 1 recording  
is completed.  
Note for DVD recording  
• If the recording time of two programmes overlap, or the End time of a programme and the Start time of  
another is same, the first 30 seconds (at the most) of the subsequent programme are cut off.  
If the End time of the programme currently being  
PROG. 1  
recorded and the Start time of the subsequent pro-  
gramme are same:  
PROG. 2  
• If PROG. 1 is a DVD recorded programme, the  
Actual  
recording  
PROG. 1  
PROG. 2  
beginning of PROG. 2 may be cut off.  
* If the cut off time exceeds 1 minute, the error number  
“E40” will appear in the Timer Programming list.  
The first 30 seconds (at the most) are cut off.*  
EN 33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
Satellite Link  
You can set the unit to start  
recording whenever it detects  
the video signal from the external  
tuner.  
Preparing for the Satellite Link  
Timer Recording:  
3
9
Select “Satellite Link” using  
[Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
Press [ENTER] again.  
In a second, the unit will be  
turned off automatically as  
it goes into the Satellite Link  
standby mode.  
• Until the time you set in “Start”,  
the clock will appear on the  
front panel.  
Setting menu will appear.  
VCR DVD  
Satellite Link  
Preparation on the tuner  
• The external tuner should be  
equipped with some kind of  
timer function. Using timer  
function of the tuner, set it to  
be turned on when it comes  
to the time you want to start  
recording, and off when it  
comes to the time you want to  
finish recording. (Refer to the  
tuner’s manual on how to set  
the timer.)  
DVD  
VCR  
Start  
Mode  
SP  
17:30 DVD  
• “Sat” will appear on the front  
panel display at the start time.  
To Standby Mode  
4
To cancel the Satellite Link  
function while in the Satellite  
Link standby mode:  
Press [T-SET] to turn on the unit.  
To cancel the Satellite Link  
function while the Satellite Link  
Recording is in progress:  
Press [STOP C] on the front panel  
of the unit.  
Select the time, media and  
recording mode using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
• Make sure to turn the power off  
when you finish setting.  
5
Preparation on this unit  
• Make sure to select the desired  
Recording mode beforehand.  
Set the desired start time  
using [Cursor K / L], then press  
[Cursor B].  
• The hour can be selected  
among 0-23.  
External tuner  
(commercially available)  
• Repeat procedures in step 5 to  
set the desired minutes.  
• If you wish to go back to the  
left, press [Cursor {].  
Scart cable (commercially available)  
DVD/VR  
DVD  
ANTENNA  
IN  
AV2 (DECDER)  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO S-VIDEO COMPONENT  
AUDIO OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
VIDEO OUT  
6
Y
P
/CB  
B
L
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
OPEN/CLOSE  
OPERATE  
AV1 (TV)  
P
/CR  
R
SETUP  
EJECT  
R
DUBBING  
Select the recording media  
using [Cursor K / L], then press  
[Cursor B].  
OUT  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
1
9
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
1
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
7
In stop mode, press [SETUP].  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Select the recording mode  
using [Cursor K / L].  
See page 24 for details.  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
2
1
2
3
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
Select “Recording” using  
[Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
6
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
8
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
Press [ENTER].  
DVD  
Recording  
REV  
FWD  
“To Standby Mode” is highlighted.  
Auto Chapter  
10 minutes  
PLAY  
VCR DVD  
Satellite Link  
Recording Audio Select (XP)  
Auto Finalise  
Dolby Digital  
OFF  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
STOP  
Satellite Link  
Bilingual Recording Audio  
External Input Audio  
Dubbing Mode  
Main  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
DVD  
VCR  
Start  
Mode  
SP  
Stereo  
17:30 DVD  
VCR DVD  
To Standby Mode  
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
34 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
Satellite Link (cont’d)  
Note  
• If you have not set the clock, the clock setting window will appear at step 3. Follow to step 4 in “Clock  
Setting” on page 22.  
• You cannot set the End time for the Satellite Link Timer Recording on this unit.  
• Recording picture will be distorted if the copy protection signal is being detected during Satellite Link  
Timer Recording.  
• When a regular Timer Recording and the Satellite Link Timer Recording are overlapped, those  
recordings are recorded as illustrated below.  
Example 2  
Example 1  
Example 3  
Timer  
Recording  
Timer  
Recording  
Timer  
Recording  
Satellite Link  
Satellite Link  
Satellite Link  
Actual  
Recording  
Actual  
Recording  
Actual  
Recording  
Settings for external equipment  
Recording from external equipment  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
1
3
2
4
3
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
Select the external input mode  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
to which the external equip-  
ment is connected. (AV1, AV2,  
AV3 or AV4)  
To use the Scart terminal or  
input jacks on the rear of this  
unit;  
To select the “AV1”, or “AV2”,  
press [0], [0], [1] or [0], [0], [2]  
accordingly or use [PROG.  
Before recording from external  
equipment, see page 15 for  
connection instructions.  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
ENTER  
RETURN  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
1
2
3
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
1
6
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
Press [ OPERATE] to turn on  
the unit.  
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
Turn on the TV and be sure to  
select the input to which the unit  
is connected.  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
/
].  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
To use the input jacks on the  
front of this unit;  
STOP  
2
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
To select “AV3”, press [0], [0], [3]  
When you want to record to a  
tape:  
or use [PROG.  
/
].  
To select “AV4”, use [PROG.  
/
].  
VCR  
DVD  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
C
N
T
N
D  
4
Insert the tape with a record  
tab into the cassette compart-  
ment.  
Select a recording mode using  
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
[REC MODE]. (See page 24.)  
5
When you want to record to  
the disc:  
Press [REC/OTR] (VCR or DVD)  
on the unit to start recording.  
VCR  
D
V
D
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
C
V
T
AD  
6
Note  
Press [OPEN/CLOSE EJECT A] to  
open the disc tray, then place  
the disc to record on.  
Press [OPEN/CLOSE EJECT A]  
again to close the disc tray.  
Press the PLAY button on the  
• During recording, if a signal  
other than PAL is detected  
(such as NTSC), recording is  
paused.  
external recording component.  
7
For tape:  
• If you want to monitor the  
programme that you are  
recording, make sure the  
device such as Satellite  
Box is turned off when it is  
connected to AV2.  
Press [STOP C/EJECT A] on the  
unit to stop recording.  
For disc:  
Press [STOP C] on the unit to  
stop recording.  
EN 35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
DV dubbing  
Guide to DV and On-Screen Display  
This function helps you to easy dubbing if you have the Digital Video camcorder that has DV output jack.  
You can control basic operations of the DV from the remote control of this unit such as playback, fast forward  
or reverse and stop all operations if the DV camcorder is in Playback mode. Use the DV cable that has 4-pin  
input jack and is compliance with the IEEE 1394 standards. When you connect to DV input jack on the front  
of this unit, select “AV4” position by using [PROG.  
information for the operating your DV camcorder.  
/
] and press [DISPLAY] to show the DV dubbing  
When the DV camcorder  
is in Playback mode...  
When the DV camcorder  
is not in Playback mode...  
1
1
1
0:00:00  
DVD-RW  
1
1
0:00:00  
DVD-RW  
Video mode  
Video mode  
The menu changes according  
to what mode of DV Camcorder.  
Switch the mode on the  
Control  
DVD  
DV  
DV  
2
5
DV Audio  
Start Rec  
Stereo1  
AB-1234  
0:00:00  
AB-1234  
0:22:54  
DV Camcorder to Playback mode  
for the dubbing information.  
SP  
1:35  
SP  
1:35  
3
4
7
6
5 Channel position  
The following instructions are  
described with the operations using  
the remote control of this unit.  
When you select “AV4” by  
using [PROG.  
appear.  
/
], “DV” will  
1 DV icon  
2 Indicator of active device  
When the “Control” is  
6 Product name of your DV  
camcorder  
If the unit cannot recognise  
the input signal from the DV  
camcorder or the unknown  
product, “No Device” will  
appear instead.  
highlighted, press [ENTER]  
to display the item selection.  
Select the device you wish to  
operate using [Cursor K / L],  
then press [ENTER] to activate.  
Select “DVD” to control this unit.  
Select “DVC” to control your DV  
camcorder.  
3 Recording audio mode  
Other than the DV camcorder  
is in stop mode, the “DV Audio”  
can be selected. Press [ENTER]  
to display the item selection  
and then using [Cursor K / L]  
to select the audio you wish to  
output. Press [ENTER] again to  
activate.  
Select “Stereo1” to dub the  
stereo sound.  
Select “Stereo2” to dub the  
sound with postrecording  
sound.  
Select “Mix” to dub the Stereo1  
and Stereo2.  
If the unit receives the input  
signal from the DV camcorder  
but the unknown product,  
****” will appear instead.  
7 Status of the current operation  
and the time counter  
Depending on the DVC's  
mechanism, the unit's counter  
and icons may not be displayed  
the same as DVC shows.  
Each icon means:  
DVC is fast forwarding.  
DVC is in stop mode.  
DVC is in playback.  
DVC is in pause mode.  
(in stop mode)  
DVC is fast reversing.  
(in stop mode)  
DVC is in reverse playback.  
DVC is fast reversing.  
DVC is fast forwarding.  
(standard speed)  
(standard speed)  
DVC is fast reversing.  
DVC is fast forwarding.  
(faster than above)  
(faster than above)  
DVC is fast reversing.  
DVC is fast forwarding.  
4 Indicator of dubbing function  
When the unit is ready for  
dubbing, “Start Rec” will  
appear.  
When the unit is in dubbing,  
“Pause Rec” will appear.  
(faster than above)  
(faster than above)  
DVC is in slow reverse  
playback.  
DVC is slow forwarding.  
(standard speed)  
DVC is slow forwarding.  
DVC is in recording.  
(faster than above)  
DVC is in recording  
pause mode.  
DVC is slow forwarding.  
(faster than above)  
36 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
DV dubbing (cont’d)  
Note  
• You cannot dub from DVC to both DVD and VCR  
format at the same time.  
• You cannot change the output mode during DVC  
to VCR dubbing. If you want to switch to the DVD  
mode, stop the VCR first.  
• During DVC to VCR dubbing, you cannot change  
channels while paused.  
• When the output is in DVD mode while playing  
back a DVD using AV4 (DV-IN), you cannot switch  
to the VCR mode.  
• If you are using anything other than AV4 (DV-  
IN) to playback DVD, you can switch to the VCR  
mode, but cannot select AV4 (DV-IN) channel.  
(You can select AV4 (DV-IN) after switching to the  
DVD mode during VCR playback.)  
• You cannot dub from DVC during timer standby  
mode.  
• During timer standby of either component,  
you cannot select AV4 (DV-IN) even on the  
component which is not in timer standby.  
• The unit does not send out the output signal to DV  
camcorder.  
• For the proper operation, connect DV camcorder  
to the unit directly. Do not connect this unit and  
the DV camcorder via any other unit.  
• Do not connect more than one DV camcorder.  
• The unit can only accept DV camcorder. Other  
DV equipment such as Set-top Box, or D-VHS VCR  
cannot be recognised.  
• Date / time and cassette memory data will not be  
recorded.  
• Pictures with a copy-guard signal cannot be  
recorded.  
• A DV terminal is a terminal that can use the  
transmission mode conforming to the IEEE 1394  
standards called “Fire Wire”. It serves as the  
interface that connects the PC and peripheral  
equipment such as “i.Link” (registered trademark  
of SONY). It enables digital dubbing between DV  
devices with little degradation.  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
4
2
Before recording from DV  
camcorder, see page 14 for  
connection instructions.  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
Press [ENTER] to display the  
4
6
7
item selection. Select “DVC”  
using [Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
ENTER  
RETURN  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
1
2
3
Insert a recordable DVD-RW/-  
R disc and make sure your DV  
camcorder is in Playback mode.  
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
1
3
6
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
5
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
D
V
D
Press [PLAY B] to find the  
point where you wish to begin  
the dubbing.  
0
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
REV  
FWD  
V
D
I
N
527D  
PLAY  
1
VCR  
DVD  
Then, press [STOP C] at the  
point you wish to start dub-  
bing.  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
5
7
STOP  
Select “DV” using [PROG.  
/
].  
DV  
AB-1234  
0:00:00  
6
Note  
Select “Start Rec” using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
The dubbing will start.  
• To avoid unrecorded part, the  
tape will rewind to the point  
a few seconds preceding the  
2
To pause dubbing:  
paused point if you select “Start  
Rec” whenever the DVC is in  
pause mode.  
Select a recording mode using  
Select “Pause Rec” using [Cursor  
[REC MODE]. (See page 24.)  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
• DVC will pause the playback and  
• If no video signal is detected  
from the DV camcorder during  
DVC to DVD dubbing, the  
recording will be paused and  
I” will flash on the screen.  
The recording will resume  
when the unit detects a video  
signal again.  
• When the DV camcorder is in  
Camera mode, refer to “Guide  
to DV and On-Screen Display”  
on page 36.  
3
the unit will pause the dubbing.  
Press [DISPLAY].  
DV dubbing menu will appear.  
7
1
1
0:00:00  
DVD-RW  
Select “Control” using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
Select “DVD” using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
Press [STOP C] to stop dubbing.  
Video mode  
Control  
DVD  
DV  
DV Audio  
Start Rec  
Stereo1  
AB-1234  
0:00:00  
EN 37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
Dubbing Mode  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
2
SETUP  
DUBBING  
Select “Recording” using  
[Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
1
You can copy a DVD disc to a  
videotape or copy a videotape to  
a DVD disc. This function will be  
available only if the DVD disc or  
the tape is not copy protected.  
Before starting this function,  
prepare for the recording on the  
DVD-RW/-R disc or the videotape.  
See pages 24-25, 87.  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
Recording menu will appear.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
DVD  
Recording  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
2
3
1
2
3
Auto Chapter  
10 minutes  
Dolby Digital  
OFF  
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
Recording Audio Select (XP)  
Auto Finalise  
6
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
Satellite Link  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
Bilingual Recording Audio  
External Input Audio  
Dubbing Mode  
Main  
0
Stereo  
REV  
FWD  
VCR DVD  
PLAY  
Note for recording to a tape:  
• The tape's record tab is intact.  
• The videotape is long enough  
to record the DVD disc.  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
STOP  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
3
Select “Dubbing Mode” using  
[Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
Note for recording to a disc:  
• The DVD disc is satisfied with  
the recording status.  
Option window will appear.  
See pages 24-25.  
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
Dubbing Mode  
VCR DVD  
VCR DVD  
DVD VCR  
Insert a disc and a tape with a  
record tab.  
1
In stop mode, press [SETUP].  
Note for VCR to DVD duplication:  
• After starting VCR to DVD duplication, the picture may be distorted because of the auto tracking  
function. This is not a malfunction. Be advised to play back the tape until the picture is stabilized, then  
set the starting point which you wish to start recording, and start VCR to DVD duplication.  
• This unit will automatically stop the duplication if playback with no image detected for more than 3  
minutes during VCR to DVD duplication.  
• If the playback sound mode of VCR is set to “STEREO”, “LEFT” or “RIGHT”, the sound mode upon dubbing  
is automatically switched to “STEREO”. If the playback sound mode is set to “MONO”, the sound mode  
upon dubbing is also “MONO”.  
• If you set “External Input Audio” to “Stereo”, the sound is recorded in “Stereo” (both Video mode and VR  
mode).  
• While in video mode, if you set “External Input Audio” to “Bilingual”, the audio set in “Bilingual  
Recording Audio” mode is recorded. While in VR mode, if you set “External Input Audio” to “Bilingual”,  
bilingual audio is recorded.  
• The main and sub audio will be simultaneously recorded (VR mode). You can select audio modes during  
playback.  
38 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
Dubbing Mode (cont’d)  
VCR to DVD  
DVD to VCR  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
5
4
4
7
8
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
Select “VCR DVD” using  
[Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
Select “DVD VCR” using  
[Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
6
4
ENTER  
RETURN  
Dubbing Mode  
VCR DVD  
Dubbing Mode  
VCR DVD  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
1
2
3
PROG.  
VCR DVD  
DVD VCR  
VCR DVD  
DVD VCR  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
STOP  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
5
5
Press [SETUP] to exit.  
Press [SETUP] to exit.  
5
VCR  
DVD  
VCR  
D
V
D
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
+
1
0
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
STOP  
Press  
first.  
C
N
N
V
I
T
D
AD  
Press [PLAY B](VCR) on the  
unit, and then press [PAUSE F]  
at the point you wish to start  
recording.  
Press [PLAY B](DVD) on the  
unit, and then press [PAUSE F]  
at the point you wish to start  
recording.  
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
6
6
VCR  
D
VD  
VCR  
DVD  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
+
1
0
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
STOP  
Press  
first.  
C
V
T
C
D
N
T
N
A52  
7
D
A527D  
Make sure to select a recording  
mode using [REC MODE]. (See  
page 24.)  
Make sure to select a recording  
mode using [REC MODE]. (See  
page 87.)  
7
7
Press [DUBBING].  
Press [DUBBING].  
VCR to DVD duplication will start.  
DVD to VCR duplication will start.  
8
8
Note  
Press [STOP C] to stop the  
Press [STOP C] to stop the  
• When you turn off the unit  
after setting the Dubbing  
recording.  
recording.  
Mode to  
the setting will be set to  
automatically.  
,
• Dubbing Mode is available  
only if the tape or disc is not  
copy protected.  
• You cannot change the output  
mode during VCR to DVD or  
DVD to VCR duplication.  
• If you want to watch the  
duplicated material, after the  
VCR to DVD duplication, press  
[DVD] first then press [PLAY B].  
• If you want to watch the  
duplicated material, after the  
DVD to VCR duplication, press  
[VCR] first then press [PLAY B].  
EN 39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
Setting a disc to protect  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
3
To prevent accidental over-  
recording, editing or erasing of  
recordings, you can protect them  
using the Setup menu.  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
Select “Disc Protect OFF ON”  
using [Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
1
5
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
2
3
4
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
Insert a recordable disc.  
Yes  
No  
Note  
1
• The Disc Protect setting is  
available only when a disc  
In stop mode, press [SETUP].  
4
recorded in VR mode is inserted.  
• You can select only “Disc  
Protect ON OFF” when a  
protected disc is inserted.  
Select “Yes” using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
The disc is protected.  
2
Select “Disc” using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
Disc  
5
To cancel the disc protect:  
Format  
Press [SETUP] to exit.  
Finalise  
• Select “Disc Protect ON OFF”  
at step 3, then select “Yes”.  
• If you insert a disc protected  
with this unit, “Disc Protect  
ON OFF” will appear instead  
of “OFF ON”.  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
Disc Protect ON OFF  
Yes  
No  
Finalising discs  
3
You will need to finalise discs to  
play them back in other players.  
Finalising may take from several  
minutes up to an hour. (A disc  
recorded in Video mode can take  
up to 15 minutes. A disc recorded  
in VR mode can take up to 60  
minutes.)  
A shorter recording period on  
the disc will require a longer time  
period for finalisation. Do not  
unplug the mains cable during  
finalisation.  
Select “Finalise” using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
OPEN/CLOSE  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
EJECT  
DUBBING  
Finalise  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
1
Yes  
No  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
ENTER  
RETURN  
2
3
4
4
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
1
2
3
PROG.  
Select “Yes” using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
Finalising will start.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
REV  
FWD  
Finalising  
90%  
PLAY  
Insert a recordable disc before  
finalising.  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
STOP  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
1
5
In stop mode, press [SETUP].  
Finalising is completed.  
2
Finalising  
100%  
Select “Disc” using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
Disc  
Format  
Finalise  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
40 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
Finalising discs (cont’d)  
To cancel finalising... (DVD-RW only)  
Press [STOP C] during the finalising is in progress. Select “Yes” using  
[Cursor { / B] then press [ENTER]. Finalising is cancelled and the unit  
switches to stop mode.  
Do you want to cancel ?  
Yes No  
If appears when [STOP C] is pressed, you cannot cancel finalising  
because the finalising has already reached at a critical point in its process.  
If “No” is selected and [ENTER] or [RETURN ] is pressed, finalising is  
continued.  
Finalising  
5%  
You cannot cancel finalising a DVD-R disc once it has started.  
Note  
• Finalising a disc in Video mode automatically creates a Title menu.  
• You can use the unit to record or edit a disc recorded in VR mode even after it is finalised. After you  
finalise a disc recorded in Video mode, you cannot edit or record anything else on that disc.  
• To release the finalisation of the DVD-RW disc, select “Undo Finalise” at step 3.  
Disc  
• If you insert a DVD-RW disc finalised with this unit, “Undo Finalise” will  
Format  
Undo Finalise  
appear instead of “Finalise”.  
• DO NOT power off during finalising. This may result in a malfunction.  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
Auto finalise  
OPEN/CLOSE  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
EJECT  
DUBBING  
3
1
5
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
You can finalise discs  
Select “Auto Finalise” using  
[Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
automatically when the disc  
space runs out if you set this in  
the Setup menu.  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
ENTER  
RETURN  
DVD  
Auto Finalise - Disc Full  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
2
3
4
1
2
3
ON  
PROG.  
1
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
OFF  
6
4
5
In stop mode, press [SETUP].  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
2
REV  
FWD  
Select “Recording” using  
[Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
STOP  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
DVD  
Recording  
4
Auto Chapter  
10 minutes  
Select “ON” using [Cursor  
Recording Audio Select (XP)  
Auto Finalise  
Dolby Digital  
OFF  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
Satellite Link  
Bilingual Recording Audio  
External Input Audio  
Dubbing Mode  
Main  
5
Stereo  
VCR DVD  
Press [SETUP] to exit.  
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
Note  
• Auto finalise function is not  
available for discs formatted  
in VR mode.  
EN 41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Disc Playback  
Information on playing back DVDs  
Read the following information before you play  
back a DVD.  
Disc  
Logo  
Playable discs  
DVD-Video  
You can play back all the discs listed on the right.  
Before attempting to play back a DVD, make sure  
it meets the requirements for Region Codes and  
Colour Systems as described in this section. Discs  
that bear any of the logos shown below will be  
played back correctly in this unit. Other disc types  
are not guaranteed to be played back.  
DVD-RW  
(VIDEO / VR mode,  
DivX® files)  
DVD-R  
(VIDEO mode,  
DivX® files)  
Colour systems  
DVDs are recorded using different colour systems  
throughout the world. The most common colour  
system, used primarily in the U.K. and other EU  
countries, is PAL. This unit uses the PAL system.  
However, it is also possible to play back DVDs  
using other colour systems, such as NTSC.  
Region codes  
DVD+RW*  
DVD+R*  
DVD-RAM  
(Only the disc with  
This unit has been designed to play back DVDs  
for Region Four (4). It is only possible to play back  
DVDs in this unit that are labelled for Region 4 or  
for ALL regions. You cannot play back DVDs that  
are labelled for other regions. Look for DVDs that  
bear either of the symbols shown below. If these  
region symbols do not appear on your DVD, you  
cannot play back the DVD in this unit.  
removable cartridge  
can be used.)  
CD-DA (AUDIO CD)  
VCD (VIDEO CD) /  
SVCD  
DIGITALVIDEO  
ALL  
4
CD-RW  
(CD-DA FORMAT,  
MP3, JPEG,  
DivX® files)  
The number inside the globe refers to region of the  
world.  
A DVD labelled for a specific region can only be  
played back in the unit with the same region code.  
CD-R  
(CD-DA FORMAT,  
MP3, JPEG,  
DivX® files)  
Playing back on DivX® file  
The unit performs Official DivX® Certified product;  
Plays all versions of DivX® video (including DivX®6 )  
with standard playback of DivX® media files.  
Discs containing the DivX® files with the DivX®  
GMC (Global Motion Compensation) playback  
feature, which is DivX® supplemental function,  
cannot be played back on this unit.  
Kodak Picture CD  
* There may be a disc which cannot be used or  
played back.  
42 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Disc Playback  
Basic playback  
Hint for DVD playback  
Start Rec.  
Title 1  
Stop/Start  
Stop Rec.  
The contents of a DVD are  
generally divided into titles.  
Titles are sometimes further  
subdivided into chapters.  
Title 2  
Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 1 Chapter 2  
Playing back a DVD-RW / DVD-R / DVD+RW / DVD+R  
disc  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
You can switch between the  
2
4
8
6
7
1
5
“Original” and “Playlist” in the VR  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
VCR  
D
V
D
mode using [MENU LIST].  
<e.g. DVD-RW VR mode Playlist>  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
C
V
T
A527D  
Playlist  
ENTER  
RETURN  
1
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
Press [ OPERATE] to turn on  
the unit.  
1
2
5
3
6
1
2
3
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
Turn on the TV and be sure to  
select the input to which the unit  
is connected.  
15/04/06 19:00 P12 XP  
4
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
2
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
Press [OPEN/CLOSE EJECT A] to  
STOP  
6
open the disc tray.  
8
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
Select the desired title using  
[Cursor K / L / { / B], then  
press [ENTER].  
3
Place the disc on the disc tray  
with its label facing up. Be sure  
to align the disc with the disc  
tray guide.  
Pop-up window will appear.  
Playlist  
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
2
5
3
6
Play  
Edit  
15/04/06 19:00 P12 XP  
4
Note  
• For DVD-RW (Video mode)  
Disc  
tray  
guide  
and DVD-R (Video mode) discs  
that are already finalised,  
a title list will be displayed  
instead of thumbnails.  
• If you insert a DVD-RW  
recorded in VR mode and it  
has a Playlist, the Playlist is  
displayed.  
7
Select “Play” using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
Playback will start.  
4
Press [OPEN/CLOSE EJECT A] to  
close the disc tray.  
8
• You can resume playback  
from where you stopped  
playing back the disc (Resume  
playback). See page 49 for  
details.  
• You can also start playback by  
pressing [PLAY B] instead of  
[ENTER] at step 6.  
• Some discs may start playback  
automatically.  
5
Press [STOP C] to stop play-  
back.  
Press [TOP MENU] to display  
the Title menu.  
To eject the disc, press  
[OPEN/CLOSE EJECT A] to open  
the disc tray, then remove the disc.  
Press [OPEN/CLOSE EJECT A] to  
close the disc tray before turning  
off the unit.  
EN 43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Disc Playback  
Basic playback (cont’d)  
Playing back a DVD-Video / CD / Video CD  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
If you are playing back a DVD-  
Video or a Video CD, a menu may  
appear.  
1
2
3
PROG.  
SKIP  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
VCR  
D
V
D
6
4
5
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
C
V
AD  
See pages 47-48 for details.  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
1
REV  
FWD  
2
3
3
back.  
Follow the steps 1 to 4 in  
“Playing back a DVD-RW / DVD-  
R / DVD+RW / DVD+R disc” on  
page 43.  
PLAY  
Press [STOP C] to stop play-  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
STOP  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
2
Press [PLAY B] to start playback.  
Playback will start.  
Playing back an MP3 / JPEG  
Hints for MP3 / JPEG files:  
• Folders are known as Groups,  
files are known as Tracks.  
• Folders are shown with the  
icon.  
It is recommended that files to  
be played back in this unit are  
recorded under the following  
specifications:  
CR  
D
V
D
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
C
V
T
AD  
[MP3]  
1
3
• MP3 files are shown with the  
• Sampling frequency: 44.1kHz or  
48kHz  
• Constant Bit Rate: 112kbps to  
320kbps  
[JPEG] Size of picture  
• Upper limit: 6300 x 5100dots  
• Lower limit: 32 x 32dots  
• Capacity limit: less than 12MB  
Follow the steps 1 to 4 in  
“Playing back a DVD-RW / DVD-  
R / DVD+RW / DVD+R disc” on  
page 43.  
icon.  
Playback will start from the  
selected track and continue  
with each one after.  
The File List will appear.  
• If you are in stop mode, press [TOP  
MENU] to display the File List.  
• JPEG files are shown with the  
icon.  
• The unit can recognise up to  
255 groups (or folders) and up  
to 999 tracks.  
• The name of each folder and file  
can be displayed using up to 29  
characters.  
Unrecognisable characters are  
replaced with asterisks.  
File List  
disc name  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
ZOOM  
folder name 1  
folder name 2  
folder name 3  
folder name 4  
3
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
1
1
2
3
4
file name 1  
file name 2  
file name 1  
file name 2  
ENTER  
RETURN  
2
3
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
1
2
3
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
1/2  
6
4
5
• Unplayable groups and tracks  
may be displayed depending on  
the recording conditions.  
• For MP3 file recorded in Variable  
Bit Rate (VBR), the unit may not  
display the actual elapsed time.  
• If there are no files in the folder,  
“No Files” is displayed.  
• High resolution or large-size  
JPEG files take a few moments  
to be displayed.  
• It is not possible to play back  
progressive JPEGs (JPEG files  
saved in progressive format) on  
this unit.  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
To exit the File List , press  
[TOP MENU] again or press  
[STOP C].  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
2
REC/OTR  
STOP  
Press [Cursor K / L] to select  
the desired folder (group) or  
file (track), then press [ENTER].  
Note  
• MP3 files cannot be recorded  
as digital sound using an MD  
or DAT deck.  
• Files with extensions other  
than “.mp3 (MP3)” or “.jpg /  
.jpeg (JPEG)” will not be listed  
in the File List.  
• Some folders or tracks  
listed in the File List may  
be unplayable due to their  
recording status.  
• The File List displays only up  
to 8 folder and file names.  
If a file is selected:  
Playback will start.  
If a folder is selected:  
The files in the folder will appear.  
Press [Cursor K / L] to select the  
track or folder you want, then  
press [ENTER].  
• Press [PLAY B], [ENTER] or  
[Cursor B] to move to any  
lower folders.  
• Press [Cursor s] or  
[RETURN ] to move back to  
the folder above.  
• It is not possible to play back  
JPEG files of 12MB or more.  
44 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Disc Playback  
Basic playback (cont’d)  
Kodak Picture CD  
• To exit the Picture CD  
thumbnail List, press  
[TOP MENU] again or press  
[STOP C].  
2 Press [Cursor K / L / { / B]  
to select a desired track to be  
played back, then press  
[PLAY B] or [ENTER].  
An image will be played back  
from the selected track and go  
to the next one in turn.  
The Picture CD is a service to  
convert photographs taken by  
a conventional film camera into  
digital data and write the data  
on a CD. You can enjoy picture  
images on the TV set by playing  
back the Picture CDs.  
Arrow icons mean the title list  
includes a next or previous  
page. Press [Cursor { / B] in  
the direction of the icon you  
wish to follow. You can also  
quick review the six thumbnails  
at once between the first and  
last pages by pressing  
3 Press [STOP C] to stop  
playback.  
For details of Kodak Picture CD,  
contact a shop that provides  
developing service of Kodak Inc.  
VCR  
D
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
[SKIP H / G].  
/
T
A27A
1 Press [TOP MENU].  
Picture CD  
Notes on JPEG and Kodak Picture CD:  
After track is displayed for 5 seconds or 10 seconds (set in the “Slide  
Show”) the display moves to the next track.  
1
4
2
5
3
6
During JPEG or Kodak Picture CD playback, press [Cursor B]  
or [Cursor {] to rotate a picture 90 degrees clockwise or  
counterclockwise respectively.  
(Not available when the display menu appears.)  
Playing back a DivX®  
OPEN/CLOSE  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
EJECT  
DUBBING  
VCR  
D
V
D
2
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG.  
VCR  
REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
Press [Cursor K / L] to select  
the desired folder (group) or  
file (track), then press [ENTER].  
C
V
T
A527D  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
ENTER  
1
1
Follow the steps 1 to 4 in  
If a file is selected:  
Playback will start.  
If a folder is selected:  
The files in the folder will appear.  
Press [Cursor K / L] to select the  
track or folder you want, then  
press [ENTER].  
• Press [PLAY B], [ENTER] or  
[Cursor B] to move to any  
lower folders.  
RETURN  
2
“Playing back a DVD-RW / DVD-  
R / DVD+RW / DVD+R disc” on  
page 43.  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
1
2
3
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
The File List will appear.  
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
File List  
disc name  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
folder name 1  
folder name 2  
folder name 3  
folder name 4  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
STOP  
1
2
3
4
5
file name 1  
file name 2  
file name 3  
file name 4  
file name 5  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
• Press [Cursor {] or  
[RETURN ] to move back to  
the folder above.  
1/2  
To exit the File List, press  
[TOP MENU] again or press  
[STOP C].  
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
EN 45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Disc Playback  
Basic playback (cont’d)  
It is recommended that files to be played back in  
Use [Cursor { / B] to select “YES” if you want  
to play back the file, or to select “NO” if you do  
not wish to play it back. Then, press [ENTER] to  
confirm the selection.  
this unit are recorded under the following speci-  
fications:  
[DivX®]  
• Official DivX® Certified product  
• Plays all versions of DivX® video (including DivX®6 )  
with standard playback of DivX® media files  
• Maximum size of image : 720 x 480 @30fps  
720 x 576 @25fps  
DivX® VOD RENTAL  
This rental has O views left.  
Do you want to use one  
of your O views now?  
• Sampling frequency of audio: 8kHz-48kHz  
• Audio type : MPEG1 audio layer 3 (MP3),  
MPEG1 audio layer 2,  
YES NO  
Dolby Digital  
• You cannot play back the DivX® VOD files, of  
which rental period has been expired. In such  
case, press [TOP MENU] and select other files  
that can be played back.  
Hint for the purchased or rental Official DivX®  
Certified product  
• When you purchased or rental a DivX® file  
through the DivX® Video-On-Demand (VOD)  
services, a registration code is required every time  
you get the new file from the DivX® VOD services.  
Refer to “DivX® VOD” on page 59.  
RENTAL EXPIRED  
This rental is expired.  
• Some DivX® VOD files are restricted with the  
limited playable times (you cannot play them  
back beyond the limit). If your DivX® VOD file has  
such limit, the playback confirmation screen will  
appear.  
Please push ‘TOP MENU’.  
• The name of group and track can be displayed up  
to 29 characters. Unrecognisable characters will  
be replaced with asterisks.  
• You can play back the disc recorded in multi-  
session.  
• Playback will be paused if the File List is displayed  
during the playback.  
• It may take a while for audio and images to be  
output after you inserted a disc and pressed  
[PLAY B].  
• When playing back the files recorded in high bit  
rates, the images can be interrupted in some  
occasions.  
• Although DivX® logo has been obtained for this  
unit, it may not be able to play back some data,  
depending on the characteristics, bit rates, or  
audio format settings, etc.  
• Use the software recognised by the DivX, Inc.  
when you make DivX® files.  
• A DivX® file whose file size exceeds 2GB cannot  
be played back.  
Hint  
• DivX® is a codec (compression/decompression)  
that can compress images to a very small amount  
of data. The software can compress video data  
from almost any sources to the size that can be  
sent on the Internet without compromising visual  
quality of the images.  
• A file with an extension of “.avi” and “.divx”  
is called an DivX® file. All files with the “.avi”  
extension are recognised as MPEG4.  
• Files whose extension other than “.avi” and “.divx”  
will not be listed on the DivX® menu. However,  
unplayable groups or tracks may be displayed,  
depending on the recording conditions.  
• Even if the file has an extension of either “.avi”  
and “.divx”, this unit cannot play it back if it is  
recorded in the format other than DivX®.  
• Folders are known as Groups; files are known as tracks.  
• A symbol of is shown on the top of the file name.  
• A maximum of 255 folders or 999 files may be  
recognised in one disc.  
• When using tools or utilities to make up DivX®  
files, read their instruction manual beforehand.  
• Never use the MPEG4 tools when you make  
DivX® files. Otherwise, noise or disturbance of the  
picture and sound may be generated.  
• If a large-sized DivX® file is selected, it may take  
a while to start the playback (over 20 seconds  
sometimes).  
• Up to 8 hierarchies can be recognised in one  
folder. Files in the 9th or deeper hierarchies  
cannot be played back.  
• If the track extends beyond the scope of screen, a  
down arrow “L” appears, indicating that the user  
can view another part on the previous page. The  
current page number and the number of total pages  
are shown on the right of the down arrow “L”.  
46 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Disc Playback  
Basic playback (cont’d)  
• Press [MENU LIST] to call up the Playback Media  
Hint  
Selection screen in stop mode.  
• If DivX® files written on CD discs cannot be played  
back, rewrite them on a DVD disc and try to play  
back.  
• If you select “Audio & Picture”, instead of “Video”  
on the Playback Media Selection screen, this unit  
can play back MP3 / JPEG files.  
• You cannot play back the DivX® VOD files  
obtained with different registration codes on this  
unit. Press [TOP MENU] and select other files that  
can be played back.  
• For more information for DivX®, please visit  
http://www.divx.com.  
• If you insert a CD-RW/-R with DivX® files that are  
mixed with MP3 and JPEG files, the Playback  
Media Selection screen will be displayed. Please  
select “Video” and proceed to next step.  
AUTHORIZATION ERROR  
Please select the media  
to play back.  
This player is not authorized to  
play this video.  
Video  
Audio & Picture  
Please push ‘TOP MENU’.  
Playing back discs using the Disc menu  
OPEN/CLOSE  
OPERATE  
Repeat this step until all the  
SETUP  
EJECT  
DUBBING  
1
2
3
features you want are set up or  
to start playing back the disc  
from the menu. The following  
operations are available.  
A DVD contains a disc menu,  
which lists the contents and  
enables you to customize  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
playback. The menu may offer  
choices for subtitle languages,  
special features, and chapter  
selection. Usually this information  
appears automatically when you  
start playback, but sometimes  
you need to press [MENU LIST]  
to display the menu.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
[MENU LIST] button:  
2
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
Displays the DVD menu, which  
will vary among discs, and may  
be same with the Title menu.  
1
2
3
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
2
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
[Cursor K / L / { / B] buttons:  
Move the cursor from item to  
item on the screen.  
[ENTER] button:  
Selects the currently highlighted  
menu option.  
0
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
VCR  
D
V
D
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
REC/OTR  
STOP  
Press  
first.  
C
V
T
A
D
STOP  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
1
Press [MENU LIST].  
[the Number buttons]:  
Selects a numbered menu option  
(available on certain discs).  
If the feature is not available,  
may appear on the TV screen.  
2
3
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
Select an item using [Cursor  
K / L / { / B], then press  
[ENTER].  
Press [MENU LIST] to exit the  
disc menu.  
Note  
• Menus vary among discs.  
Refer to the information  
accompanying the disc for  
details.  
EN 47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Disc Playback  
Basic playback (cont’d)  
Playing back a disc using the Title menu  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
The disc will start playing  
back at the title you selected.  
The following operations are  
available.  
[TOP MENU] button:  
Displays the DVD “Title Menu”  
which will vary between discs.  
[Cursor K / L / { / B] buttons:  
Move the cursor from item to  
item on the screen.  
[ENTER] button:  
Selects the currently highlighted  
menu option.  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
Some DVDs have a Title menu,  
which lists the titles available on  
the DVD. You can start playing  
back such discs at a specific title.  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
1
2
3
ENTER  
RETURN  
2
VCR  
D
V
D
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
1
2
3
STOP  
Press  
first.  
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
C
V
T
A527D  
6
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
1
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
Press [TOP MENU].  
The Title menu will appear.  
If the feature is not available,  
may appear on the TV screen.  
Note  
[TOP MENU] will not be  
available for some DVDs.  
• Menus vary among discs.  
Refer to the information  
accompanying the disc for  
details.  
[the Number buttons]:  
2
Selects a numbered menu option  
(available on certain discs).  
Select a desired item using  
[Cursor K / L / { / B], then  
press [ENTER].  
3
Press [TOP MENU] to exit.  
PBC function for Video CDs  
This unit conforms to ver.1.1 and  
ver.2.0 of the Video CD standard  
playback control (PBC) function.  
This enables you to play back  
interactive software using menu  
screens. Refer to the information  
accompanying the Video CD.  
Ver.1.1 (without PBC function):  
You can still enjoy playback of  
pictures and music from the CD.  
Ver.2.0 (with PBC function):  
“PBC ON” will appear on the  
screen and display when playing  
back a Video CD with the PBC  
function.  
Note  
• When playing back Video CDs with the PBC function, “Pbc” is  
displayed instead of the playing back time and current track  
indications on the front panel display.  
• Some operations cannot be performed unless the function is  
cancelled either automatically or intentionally by you.  
• Operations that are not available when the PBC function is set to  
“ON” are indicated by the following symbol in this manual:  
(PBC OFF)  
Playing back a Video CD using the Title menu  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
VCR  
D
V
D
3
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
Press [RETURN ] to go back  
to the Title menu.  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
C
V
T
A527D  
ENTER  
RETURN  
1
3
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
When playing back a Video CD  
with the PBC function, the Title  
menu will appear automati-  
cally.  
1
2
3
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
2
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
Note  
2
Press [the Number buttons] to  
select the desired title.  
Playback will start at the selected  
title.  
• While the On-Screen Display  
appears, you cannot perform  
steps 2 and 3.  
48 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Disc Playback  
PBC function for Video CDs (cont’d)  
Cancelling and Recalling the PBC function  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
(PBC OFF)  
3
VCR  
D
V
D
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
+
1
0
T-SET TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
1
5
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
Select “PBC (Video CD only)”  
using [Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
C
V
T
A527D  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
ZOOM  
Insert a Video CD.  
TOP MENU  
RETURN  
MENU LIST  
ENTER  
1
4
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
2
3
4
In stop mode, press [SETUP].  
1
2
3
Select “OFF” using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
2
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
Select “CD Playback Mode”  
using [Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
5
0
Press [SETUP] to exit.  
To recall the PBC function, select  
“ON” in step 4 above.  
CD Playback Mode  
Note  
Random Play  
Program Play  
• The default setting of “PBC  
(Video CD only)” is “ON”.  
PBC (Video CD only)  
Slide Show  
ON  
5 sec.  
Special playback  
Resume playback  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
SKIP  
2
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
Press [PLAY B].  
2
REV  
FWD  
In a few seconds, playback will  
resume from the point at which  
you stopped it before. Even if you  
turn off the unit, you can resume  
playback at the same point after  
turning back on the unit.  
To cancel the resume playback  
and start playing back the disc  
from the beginning:  
PLAY  
(PBC OFF)  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
STOP  
You can resume playback from  
the point where you stopped it  
before.  
1
2
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
VCR  
D
V
D
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
Note  
C
V
T
AD  
• For Video CDs, if you turn PBC  
on using the Setup menu, the  
resume function is cancelled.  
• For MP3 and JPEG files,  
Press [STOP C] while playback is  
stopped.  
1
During playback, press  
[STOP C].  
The resume message will appear.  
playback will resume from  
the beginning of the track at  
which playback was stopped.  
EN 49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Disc Playback  
Special playback (cont’d)  
Fast forward / Fast reverse  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
1
2
3
• For Audio CDs and MP3 files,  
approximate speed is fixed at  
x8 with sound.  
PROG.  
SKIP  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
• For Video CDs, approximate  
forward speeds are x2, x8 and  
x16, and approximate reverse  
speeds are x2, x8 and x16.  
• For DivX® files, approximate  
forward speeds are x2, x20 and  
x40, and approximate reverse  
speeds are x5, x20 and x40.  
• To return to playback at normal  
speed, press [PLAY B].  
• Picture quality of DivX® files in  
fast reverse is lower than that  
in fast forward.  
• For some DivX® files, Fast  
forward/Fast reverse may not  
function.  
0
REV  
FWD  
VCR  
D
V
D
PLAY  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
1
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
C
V
T
AD  
REC/OTR  
STOP  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
1
During playback, press  
[FWD D / q] or [REV E / r].  
Each time you press  
Note  
[FWD D / q]or [REV E / r],  
the approximate speed will  
change as follows.  
• Forward/reverse speeds  
are indicated with icons as  
follows.  
Fast forward or fast reverse  
playback across titles (for DVDs)  
or tracks (for MP3) is not possible.  
Forward (Approx. Speed):  
x2:  
x20:  
x40:  
Reverse (Approx. Speed):  
Normal  
x5:  
x20:  
x40:  
speed  
x40  
x20  
x5  
x2  
x20  
x40  
playback  
Skipping TV commercials during playback  
OPEN/CLOSE  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
EJECT  
DUBBING  
e.g. Press [CM SKIP] once.  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
To enjoy recorded programmes  
without any interruptions, press  
[CM SKIP].  
1
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
ENTER  
RETURN  
C
D
V
D
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
1
2
3
PROG.  
C
V
T
A527D  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
CM Skip 30 sec.  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
1
0
During playback, press  
[CM SKIP].  
REV  
FWD  
(forwarding 30 seconds.)  
PLAY  
Normal playback will start 30-  
second advanced point from the  
point at which you press  
[CM SKIP].  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
STOP  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
Each time you press [CM SKIP],  
the start point will move another  
30 seconds forward and playback  
resume automatically.  
You can press [CM SKIP] up to 6  
times (180 seconds).  
B
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
Playback will restart automatically.  
50 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Disc Playback  
Special playback (cont’d)  
Pause  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
1
2
3
PROG.  
SKIP  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
VCR  
D
V
D
0
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
REV  
FWD  
2
1
C
V
T
A527D  
PLAY  
F
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
1
STOP  
During playback, press  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
[PAUSE F]].  
Playback will pause with the  
sound muted.  
2
Press [PLAY B] to resume play-  
back.  
Rapid Play  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
B
B
B
2
: Press [RAPID PLAY] once  
during playback.  
Plays back approximately  
at 0.8 times of normal play-  
back.  
: Press [RAPID PLAY] twice  
during playback.  
Plays back approximately  
at 1.3 times of normal play-  
back.  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
1
2
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
Rapid Play function is available  
only during playback.  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
Available only on discs recorded  
in the Dolby Digital format, Rapid  
Play plays back in a slightly faster  
/ slower speed while keeping  
the sound quality just as normal  
playback.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
1
2
3
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
: Press [RAPID PLAY] three  
times to play back in nor-  
mal speed.  
VCR  
D
V
D
REV  
FWD  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
PLAY  
C
V
T
AD  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
No effects.  
STOP  
1
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
During playback, press [RAPID  
PLAY].  
Press [PLAY B] to continue the  
normal playback.  
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
Note  
• Audio (language) setting  
cannot be changed while  
using this mode.  
• This feature may not work at  
some point in a disc.  
• Audio is PCM during Rapid  
play mode.  
• When you select “PAL” in “TV  
System” (see pages 83-84),  
this function is not available  
with discs recorded using the  
NTSC system.  
EN 51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Disc Playback  
Special playback (cont’d)  
Step by step playback  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
2
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
Press [SKIP H / G] repeat-  
edly.  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
VCR  
D
V
D
Each time you press [SKIP G],  
playback will go forward one  
frame (or step) at a time with the  
sound muted.  
To go backward one frame (or  
step), press [SKIP H].  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
C
V
T
AD  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
1
2
3
PROG.  
1
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
During playback, press  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
[PAUSE F].  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
2
1
0
Press and hold [SKIP G] to  
continue going forward.  
To continue going backward,  
press and hold [SKIP H].  
REV  
FWD  
3
PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
STOP  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
3
Press [PLAY B] to resume play-  
F
back.  
Note  
• Only step by step forward is  
available when playing back  
Video CDs and discs with  
DivX® files.  
Slow forward / Slow reverse playback  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
1
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
VCR  
D
V
D
REC/OTR  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
STOP  
Press  
first.  
C
V
T
AD  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
1
During playback, press [PAUSE F], then press [FWD D / q] or  
[REV E / r].  
Each time you press [FWD D / q] or [REV E / r], the  
approximate speed change as follows.  
Note  
• Forward / reverse speeds  
(The sound will remain muted.)  
are indicated with icons as  
follows.  
Forward (Approx. Speed):  
Pause  
x1/4  
x1/8  
x1/16  
x1/16  
x1/8  
x1/3  
x1/16:  
x1/8:  
x1/3:  
To return to normal playback, press [PLAY B].  
Reverse (Approx. Speed):  
x1/16:  
x1/8:  
x1/4:  
• For some DivX® files, Slow  
forward / Slow reverse may  
not function.  
• Only slow forward is available  
when playing back Video CDs  
and discs with DivX® files.  
52 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Disc Playback  
Special playback (cont’d)  
Zoom  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
3
SETUP  
DUBBING  
Select the desired zoom factor  
to zoom using [Cursor K / L],  
then press [ENTER].  
The zoom area is displayed.  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
1
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
VCR  
D
V
D
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
ENTER  
+
1
0
RETURN  
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
C
V
T
A527D  
2
3
4
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
1
2
3
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
1
6
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
During playback, press  
[DISPLAY].  
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
Press [ZOOM] during playback,  
and follow from step 3.  
Note  
2
• To exit the menu, press  
Select the  
[Cursor { /  
[ENTER].  
icon using  
], then press  
4
[DISPLAY].  
B
Select the desired zoom posi-  
tion using [Cursor K / L /  
{ / B], then press [ENTER].  
Zoom playback will start.  
• To cancel the zoom function,  
select “x1.0” using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
• If selecting a smaller factor  
than that currently selected,  
the zoom area is not  
1
1
0:00:00  
DVD-Video  
1.2  
1.5  
2.0  
Four options are available, “x1.0”,  
“x1.2”, “x1.5” and “x2.0”. These  
are displayed excluding the  
current zoom rate.  
displayed.  
• You cannot slide the zoomed  
picture on some JPEG files.  
Marker Setup  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
ZOOM  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
Marker setup menu for Audio CD  
mode  
ENTER  
RETURN  
2
3
4
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
1
0:00:00  
Audio CD  
1
2
3
PROG.  
(PBC OFF)  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
You can assign a specific point  
on a disc to return later.  
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
VCR  
D
V
D
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
1
REV  
STOP  
Press  
first.  
FWD  
V
I
T
A52D  
PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
1
STOP  
During playback, press  
[DISPLAY].  
Note  
3
• To clear a marker, select the  
marker number you wish to  
clear, then press  
2
Select the desired marker  
icon using [Cursor number using [Cursor K / L].  
Select the  
{ / B], then press [ENTER].  
Marker setup menu for DVD-  
Video mode  
When the disc reaches the  
desired point, press [ENTER].  
The title (track) number and the  
time are displayed.  
[CLEAR/C-RESET].  
• You can mark up to 6 points.  
• All markers are erased when  
you perform the following  
operations.  
1
1
0:00:00  
DVD-Video  
1
2
3
4
5
6
4
- Open the disc tray.  
- Turn off the power.  
- Record on a recordable disc.  
- Change the mode between  
Original and Playlist.  
To return to the marker later,  
select the desired marker  
number using [Cursor K / L],  
then press [ENTER].  
(VR mode)  
EN 53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Disc Playback  
Search  
Title / Chapter search  
Searching for a Title:  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
3
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
Enter the desired title number  
to search for using [Cursor  
K / L] or [the Number buttons],  
then press [ENTER].  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
C
D
V
D
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
+
1
0
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
C
V
T
AD  
ENTER  
RETURN  
2
3
4
1
Using [SKIP H / G] buttons  
Title search will start.  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
1
2
3
PROG.  
Searching for a Chapter:  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
1
6
4
5
3
4
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
During playback, press  
[SKIP G] to skip the current  
title or chapter and move to  
the next.  
7
8
9
3
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
Press [Cursor { / B] to high-  
light the number displayed in  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
the right side of the  
icon.  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
The unit moves to the next title  
or chapter one after the other.  
To go back to the previous title  
or chapter, press [SKIP H]  
repeatedly.  
REC/OTR  
STOP  
4
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
Enter the desired chapter  
number to search for using  
[Cursor K / L] or [the Number  
buttons], then press [ENTER].  
Chapter search will start.  
Using the [DISPLAY] button  
1
Note  
During playback, press  
[DISPLAY].  
01 /01  
001/028  
00:00:00/02:18:33  
• Total number of chapters and  
playback time of the selected  
title are also displayed.  
• The title number and playback  
time of the selected chapter  
are also displayed.  
2
Select the  
icon using  
Total number  
of titles  
Total time  
of titles  
[Cursor { / B], then press  
[ENTER].  
Total number  
of chapters  
for the title number is  
highlighted.  
Track search  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
Using the [DISPLAY] button  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
ENTER  
(PBC OFF)  
1
RETURN  
2
3
VCR  
D
V
D
During playback, press  
[DISPLAY].  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
+
1
0
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
1
2
3
V
I
T
A52D  
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
3
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
Using [SKIP H / G] buttons  
7
8
9
2
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
Select the  
icon using  
1
1
[Cursor { / B], then press  
[ENTER].  
for the track number is  
highlighted.  
During playback, press  
[SKIP G] to skip the current  
track and move to the next.  
The unit moves to the next track  
one after the other.  
Note  
• For Video CDs, you can  
perform the track search  
function in stop mode  
without turning PBC off  
manually.  
3
To go back to the previous track,  
press [SKIP H] repeatedly. The  
unit moves backward one track  
at a time.  
Enter the desired track number  
to search for using [Cursor  
K / L ] or [the Number but-  
tons], then press [ENTER].  
Track search will start.  
• During Random playback or  
Programme playback, you  
cannot search the desired  
track.  
54 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Disc Playback  
Search (cont’d)  
Direct Search  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
You can search the desired track  
directly.  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
VCR  
D
V
D
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
V
I
T
AD  
ENTER  
RETURN  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
Using [the Number buttons]  
1
2
3
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
1
1
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
SKIP  
During playback, if the display  
menu is not displayed, press  
[the Number buttons] to enter  
the desired track number.  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
Note  
• During Random playback or  
Programme playback, you  
cannot search the desired  
track directly.  
Time search  
OPEN/CLOSE  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
EJECT  
DUBBING  
4
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
Enter the desired time to  
search for using [Cursor K / L]  
or [the Number buttons], then  
press [ENTER].  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
(PBC OFF)  
ENTER  
RETURN  
2
3
4
VCR  
D
V
D
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
Time search will start.  
STOP  
Press  
first.  
1
2
3
C
V
T
PROG.  
A527D  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
4
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
SKIP  
1
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
During playback, press  
[DISPLAY].  
1
Note  
• During Random playback or  
Programme playback, you  
cannot search the desired  
time.  
• The title number and chapter  
number of the setting time  
are also displayed.  
2
Select the  
icon using  
[Cursor { / B], then press  
[ENTER].  
for the title or track number is  
highlighted.  
• Time search function is  
available only in the same  
track or title.  
• If the time search is not  
available, there is no display.  
3
Press [Cursor B] to highlight  
the number displayed in the  
right side of the  
icon.  
EN 55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Disc Playback  
Repeat/Random/Programme playback / Slide Show  
Repeat playback  
Chapter:  
The current chapter will be  
played back repeatedly.  
(DVD only)  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
(PBC OFF)  
All:  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
The current disc will be played  
back repeatedly.  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
VCR  
D
V
D
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
C
V
T
ENTER  
AD  
RETURN  
(DVD-RW (VR mode), CD, Video  
CD, MP3, JPEG and DivX® only)  
A-B:  
The A-B point will be played back  
repeatedly. (DVD, CD, Video CD  
and DivX® only)  
When pressing [ENTER] while A-  
B is highlighted, A-B repeat is set.  
• Press [ENTER] again to decide  
the starting point (A).  
2
3
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
1
2
3
PROG.  
1
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
During playback, press  
[DISPLAY].  
Press [REPEAT ] during  
playback, and follow from step 3.  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
1
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
2
STOP  
Select the  
[Cursor { /  
[ENTER].  
icon using  
], then press  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
B
• Press [ENTER] after setting  
point (A) to select the ending  
point (B).  
1
3
Track:  
Select the desired option to  
repeat using [Cursor K / L],  
then press [ENTER].  
The selected repeat playback will  
start.  
The following operations are  
available.  
The current track will be played  
back repeatedly. (CD, Video CD,  
MP3, JPEG and DivX® only)  
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
Group:  
The current group will be played  
back repeatedly. (MP3, JPEG  
(except Picture CD) and DivX® only)  
Title:  
The current title will be played  
back repeatedly. (DVD only)  
Note  
• To cancel the repeat playback, select “OFF” at step 3. The repeat  
setting is also cancelled when you stop playback.  
• You can only set A-B repeat playback within the current title (for  
DVDs) or current track (for Audio CDs, Video CDs and discs with  
DivX® files).  
• You cannot select “Group” during the random playback of MP3  
and JPEG files.  
• For some DivX® files, A-B Repeat playback may not function.  
• For Video CDs with PBC function, repeat play does not work while the  
PBC function is on.  
56 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Disc Playback  
Repeat/Random/Programme playback / Slide Show (cont’d)  
Random playback  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
(PBC OFF)  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
1
CD Playback Mode menu will  
appear.  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
<e.g. Audio CD>  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
You can use this function to play  
back a disc randomly instead of  
in the recorded order.  
CD Playback Mode  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Random Play  
Program Play  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
2
3
1
2
3
VCR  
D
V
D
PROG.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
6
4
5
C
V
T
A527D  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
1
0
In stop mode, press [SETUP].  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
2
REC/OTR  
STOP  
Select “CD Playback Mode”  
using [Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
3
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
Select “Random Play” using  
[Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
Random playback will start.  
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
Note  
• To cancel random playback, press [STOP C] twice during random  
playback. “Playmode OFF” appears on the screen.  
• For Video CDs with PBC function, the PBC setting will be switched  
to off automatically when you start random playback.  
• During random playback, if you forward the track to the end, the  
playback speed of the next track will be normal.  
• During random playback, you cannot use the search function  
except for the search with [SKIP H / G]. By pressing [SKIP  
H], you can return only to the beginning of the current track.  
EN 57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Disc Playback  
Repeat/Random/Programme playback / Slide Show (cont’d)  
Programme playback  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
(PBC OFF)  
3
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
You can programme the disc to  
play back in your desired order.  
Select the desired track using  
[Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER] or [Cursor B].  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
VCR  
D
V
D
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
ENTER  
RETURN  
+
1
0
2
3
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
C
V
T
A527D  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
1
2
3
Program Play  
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
1
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
09 --  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
7
8
9
SKIP  
Follow the steps 1 and 2 in  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
“Random playback” on page 57.  
4
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
2
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
Total 0:06:11  
Select “Program Play” using  
[Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
STOP  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
4
Program Play  
Press [PLAY B] to start pro-  
gramme playback.  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
Total 0:00:00  
Note  
• To erase tracks you selected, press [CLEAR/C-RESET].  
• You can make up to 50 track settings.  
• To cancel programme playback, press [STOP C] twice during  
programme playback. “Playmode OFF” appears on the screen.  
• You may also select the desired track using [the Number buttons]  
at step 3.  
• For Video CDs with PBC function, the PBC setting will be switched  
to off automatically when you start programme playback.  
• During programme playback, if you forward the track to the end,  
the playback speed of the next track will be normal.  
• During programme playback, you cannot use the search function  
except for the search with [SKIP H / G].  
Slide Show  
OPEN/CLOSE  
OPERATE  
3
SETUP  
EJECT  
DUBBING  
You can select the display time  
between 5 seconds and 10  
seconds.  
Select the display time using  
[Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
4
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
VCR  
D
V
D
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
C
V
T
AD  
ENTER  
4
RETURN  
Press [SETUP] to exit.  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
2
3
1
2
3
1
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
Follow the steps 1 and 2 in  
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
“Random playback” on page 57.  
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
2
Select “Slide Show” using  
[Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
Note  
• Large-size JPEG files take a  
few moments to be displayed.  
58 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Disc Playback  
Repeat/Random/Programme playback / Slide Show (cont’d)  
DivX® VOD  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
Playback menu will appear.  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
1
Playback  
DVD  
This unit allows you to play back  
the files purchased or rented  
from DivX® Video-On-Demand  
(VOD) services. The files are  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
Audio  
Video  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
Language  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Parental Lock  
DivX® VOD  
All  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
available on the internet. When  
you purchase or rent DivX® VOD  
files on the internet, you will  
be asked to enter a registration  
code. This menu item provides  
you with the registration code.  
2
3
1
2
3
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
Note  
3
• One registration code is only  
valid for one DivX® VOD file.  
• You must first download the  
file from the internet and play  
it back on this unit before you  
are able to get another code.  
• You must follow the steps 1 to  
3 every time you purchase or  
rent a DivX® VOD file from the  
internet.  
Select “DivX® VOD” using  
[Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
VCR  
D
V
D
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
C
V
T
A527D  
Your registration code will appear.  
1
DVD  
DivX® VOD  
In stop mode, press [SETUP].  
2
DivX® VOD  
Select “Playback” using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
Your registration code is :  
٤٤٤٤٤٤٤٤  
To learn more visit  
www.divx.com/vod  
• For more information for  
DivX®, please visit  
http://www.divx.com/vod.  
Selecting the format of audio and video  
You can select the format of audio and video to suit the content of the  
disc you are playing back.  
Switching subtitles  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
1
1
0:00:00  
DVD-Video  
Many DVD-Videos have subtitles  
in one or more languages. The  
available languages are usually  
printed on the disc case. You can  
switch subtitle languages at any  
time during playback.  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
OFF  
1.English  
2.Japanese  
ENTER  
2
3
RETURN  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
1
2
3
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
VCR  
D
V
D
SKIP  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
0
C
V
AD  
1
1
Note  
3
During playback, press  
[DISPLAY].  
Select the desired subtitle  
language using [Cursor K / L],  
then press [ENTER].  
• With some discs it is only  
possible to change the  
subtitle language from the  
2
Subtitles are displayed in the  
selected language.  
If you select “OFF”, subtitles will  
disappear.  
disc menu. Press [TOP MENU]  
or [MENU LIST] to display the  
disc menu.  
Select the  
[Cursor { /  
[ENTER].  
icon using  
B
], then press  
• If a 4-digit language code  
appears in the subtitle  
menu at step 3, refer to the  
“Language code” on page 95.  
• For discs with DivX® files,  
the screen only displays the  
number of subtitle languages.  
EN 59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Disc Playback  
Selecting the format of audio and video (cont’d)  
Switching audio soundtrack  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
3
SETUP  
DUBBING  
Select a desired audio sound-  
track or audio channel using  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
When playing back a DVD-Videos  
recorded with two or more  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
[Cursor K /  
[ENTER].  
With a DVD Video:  
Audio soundtrack will switch.  
Example:  
English Spanish French  
L
], then press  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
soundtracks (often in different  
languages), you can switch among  
them during playback.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
2
3
4
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
1
2
3
PROG.  
When playing back DVD-RW discs  
recorded in VR mode, you can  
switch to main audio (L), sub audio  
(R) or a combination of both (L / R).  
When playing back Audio CDs,  
Video CDs or DivX® files, you can  
switch among the left, the right  
channel, and stereo.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
With a DVD-RW in VR mode:  
Audio channel menu will appear.  
Follow the step 4.  
0
REV  
FWD  
1
PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
With an Audio CD, Video CD or  
DivX® files:  
The Audio channel will switch.  
Example:  
STEREO L-ch R-ch  
STOP  
C
D
V
D
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
C
V
T
AD  
1
1
During playback, press  
[DISPLAY].  
4
Select the desired audio chan-  
Note  
Press [AUDIO] during playback,  
and follow from step 3.  
nel using [Cursor K /  
L
], then  
• With some discs it is only  
possible to change the  
soundtrack from the disc  
press [ENTER].  
The Audio channel will switch.  
2
menu. Press [TOP MENU] or  
[MENU LIST] to display the  
disc menu.  
Select the  
[Cursor { /  
[ENTER].  
icon using  
B
], then press  
Switching virtual surround system  
<DVD-RW VR mode>  
1
1
0:00:00  
DVD-RW  
OPEN/CLOSE  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
EJECT  
DUBBING  
VR Playlist  
OFF  
Type 1  
Type 2  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
You can enjoy stereophonic  
virtual space through your  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
exciting 2 channel stereo system.  
<Audio CD>  
VCR  
D
V
D
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
1
0:00:00  
Audio CD  
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
ENTER  
RETURN  
STOP  
Press  
first.  
2
3
C
V
T
A527D  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
OFF  
Type 1  
Type 2  
1
2
3
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
1
6
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
During playback, press  
[DISPLAY].  
7
8
9
<MP3 files>  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
1
0:00:00  
MP3  
Display menu will appear.  
1
REV  
FWD  
OFF  
Type 1  
Type 2  
PLAY  
2
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
Select the  
icon using  
STOP  
[Cursor { / B], then press  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
3
[ENTER].  
Select “OFF”, “Type 1” or  
“Type 2” using [Cursor K / L],  
then press [ENTER].  
Virtual Surround menu will appear.  
<DVD-Video>  
1
1
0:00:00  
DVD-Video  
Note  
• OFF:  
No effect  
• Select Virtual Surround “OFF”  
in a case sound is distorted.  
• The setting will be kept “OFF”  
when the unit is turned off.  
• Type 1: Natural effect  
OFF  
Type 1  
Type 2  
• Type 2: Emphasised effect  
60 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Disc Playback  
Selecting the format of audio and video (cont’d)  
Switching camera angles  
2
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
Some DVD-Videos feature scenes  
shot from two or more angles.  
The disc case is usually marked  
with an angle icon if the disc has  
multi-angle scenes.  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
Select the  
icon using  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
[Cursor { / B], then press  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
[ENTER].  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
The angle will switch each time  
you press [ENTER].  
VCR  
D
V
D
ENTER  
RETURN  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
2
1
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
C
V
T
AD  
1
2
3
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
1
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
During playback, press  
[DISPLAY].  
The angle icon appears when  
a switching camera angle is  
available. (Available only when  
the angle icon appears in bottom  
right on the TV screen.)  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
STOP  
1
1
0:00:00  
DVD-Video  
Note  
• If the ANGLE ICON setting is “OFF” in the Setup menu, the  
icon will appear only when the disc is played back and the Display  
menu appears.  
• Even when the  
icon is not displayed, you can select the angle if  
the currently played back title has at least two multi-angle scenes.  
Reducing block noise  
3
OPEN/CLOSE  
OPERATE  
Select the desired option using  
[Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
SETUP  
EJECT  
DUBBING  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
VCR  
D
V
D
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
This function reduces noise in the  
playback picture.  
When playing back discs  
recorded in long time modes  
such as SLP or SEP, select “Type  
1” or “Type 2”. “Type 2” is more  
effective.  
C
V
T
AD  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
ENTER  
RETURN  
1
2
3
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
During playback, press  
[DISPLAY].  
1
2
3
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
SKIP  
2
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
When playing back discs with a  
little noise, such as DVD-Videos,  
select “OFF”.  
Select the  
icon using  
1
REV  
FWD  
[Cursor { / B], then press  
PLAY  
[ENTER].  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
Noise Reduction menu will  
appear.  
STOP  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
1
1
0:00:00  
DVD-Video  
OFF  
Type 1  
Type 2  
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
EN 61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Information on disc editing  
You can edit a disc recorded using the PAL system. It is not possible to edit discs recorded using the NTSC system.  
Guide to a title list  
The title list enables you to check the titles recorded on a disc easily. You can choose a title to play back  
from the screen and easily edit the titles as you wish. The items on the title list are as follows.  
Press [TOP MENU].  
<Main Title List>  
<Specific title options>  
Original  
Original  
1
Title Delete  
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture  
Protect  
1
1
2
5
3
6
15/04/06 19:00 P12 XP  
4
15/04/06 19:00 P12 XP  
0:00:59  
2
3
4
9
8
7
6
5
1
2
Recording format status of the current disc.  
To select a title recorded on the disc for editing,  
move the cursor to the title and press [ENTER].  
If the title is protected, the protect icon will  
appear.  
• It is not possible to protect a title on the  
Playlist.  
Arrow icons mean the title list includes a next  
or previous page. Press [Cursor { / B] in the  
direction of the icon you wish to follow. You  
can also quick review the six thumbnails at once  
between the first and last pages by pressing  
[SKIP H / G].  
5
Available title editing menu items vary  
depending on the disc and format types.  
You can edit the title and details as you wish.  
Time status bar of the recording.  
• After editing, playback starts from this point.  
The selected title from the title list thumbnails.  
• The selected title is played back automatically.  
Playback status of the current disc.  
6
7
3
8
9
4
Edit the recorded disc  
You will find editing discs is easy. This unit offers convenient edit functions which are possible only with  
DVD-RW/-R discs.  
You can edit the following from a title list.  
• Assigning a name to a title  
• Setting pictures for thumbnails  
• Adding or deleting chapter marks  
• Deleting titles or parts of titles  
(Possible editing functions depend on the recording • After finalising a disc in Video mode, you cannot  
format and editing method.)  
Finalising a Disc  
• This will allow a disc that is recorded on this unit to  
be played back on a different DVD player - without  
finalisation it will not be playable on another  
player.  
edit any information that is on that disc.  
• If you have recorded in VR mode on DVD-RW disc,  
then editing is still permitted after finalising.  
Original and Playlist (VR mode)  
You can edit the recordings in Playlist without  
changing the original recordings. Playlist does not  
take up much disc space.  
What “Original” or “Playlist” is for?  
Throughout this manual, you will find Original and  
Playlist which refer to the actual content and the  
edited version.  
Original content refers to what’s actually  
Original  
recorded on the disc.  
Playlist content refers to the edited  
Playlist  
version of the disc; how the Original  
content is to be played.  
62 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Information on disc editing (cont’d)  
Editing discs  
Type of title  
Item  
Page  
Deleting titles  
Editing title names  
Video  
Mode  
64  
65  
DVD-RW  
VR Mode  
Original  
Adding or deleting chapter marks  
Setting pictures for thumbnails  
Deleting a part of a title  
67-68  
69  
70-71  
Dividing a title  
72  
73  
74  
75  
DVD-RW  
VR Mode  
Playlist  
Combining titles  
Adding titles to a Playlist  
Erasing all Playlist  
DVD-RW VR mode  
Original only  
Setting or releasing the title protection  
76  
77  
DVD-RW  
Video mode only  
Setting or clearing all the chapter marks in one title  
Note  
• Original titles once edited will not remain as recorded originally. When you want to leave the original as  
it is, edit the Playlist as you prefer.  
• Once all editings are made, press [RETURN ] in several times to exit the editing mode. “Writing to  
Disc” appears momentarily. It also appears when opening the disc tray or pressing [ OPERATE] before  
exiting the editing mode after editing.  
Notes for deleting titles  
After the disc is fully recorded:  
DVD-RW  
DVD-R  
• When a title is deleted from  
DVD-RW disc in VR mode ,  
the recordable disc space  
will be increased.  
• When the last title is deleted from  
DVD-RW disc in Video mode , the  
recordable space will be increased.  
• When a title is deleted from  
DVD-R disc, the recordable  
space will NOT be increased.  
The Full-Recorded disc  
The Full-Recorded disc  
The Full-Recorded disc  
Delete!  
Delete!  
Delete!  
Delete!  
The deleted title  
cannot be crea-  
ted the space.  
You cannot  
record  
a new title.  
You cannot  
record  
a new title.  
You can record  
a new title.  
You can record  
a new title.  
EN 63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing discs  
Deleting titles  
Original  
Playlist  
4
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
Select “Title Delete” using  
[Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
You can delete titles which you  
do not need anymore.  
Be advised that the titles once  
deleted cannot be brought  
back to the disc. Be sure to read  
“Notes for deleting titles” on page  
63 before you delete the title.  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
1
6
Confirmation window will appear.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
2
3
4
5
Playlist - Title Delete  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
1
2
3
Yes  
3
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
No  
6
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
C
D
V
D
7
8
9
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
SKIP  
+
1
0
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
0
C
V
T
A527D  
REV  
FWD  
15/04/06 19:00 P12 XP  
0:00:59  
PLAY  
1
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
In stop mode, press [TOP MENU].  
Title list, Original or Playlist will  
appear.  
STOP  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
5
• Press [MENU LIST] to switch  
between “Original” and  
“Playlist” if the disc is recorded  
in VR mode.  
Select “Yes” using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
“Are you sure?” will appear.  
Select “Yes” using [Cursor K / L]  
and then press [ENTER].  
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
2
Playlist - Title Delete  
Select the desired title using  
[Cursor K / L / { / B], then  
press [ENTER].  
Are you sure?  
3
Yes  
No  
Pop-up window will appear.  
<e.g. DVD-RW VR mode Playlist>  
15/04/06 19:00 P12 XP  
Wait for a moment.  
Playlist  
1
2
5
Title is deleted.  
Play  
Edit  
15/04/06 19:00 P12 XP  
4
6
6
Press [RETURN ] or [STOP C]  
to exit.  
Writing on the disc starts.  
It may take a while to write the  
data on a disc.  
3
Select “Edit” using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
Edit menu will appear.  
Playlist  
Title Delete  
3
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture  
Title Dividing  
Title Combining  
15/04/06 19:00 P12 XP  
0:00:59  
64 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing discs (cont’d)  
Editing title names  
Original  
Playlist  
4
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
Select “Yes” using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
The name you edited becomes  
the title.  
You can edit the title names  
from this menu.  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
The title names you edit will  
appear on Title List / Original /  
Playlist.  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Playlist - Edit Title Name  
5
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
VCR  
D
V
D
2
3
4
Yes  
3
1
2
3
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
+
1
0
PROG.  
P
L
A
Y
No  
STOP  
Press  
first.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
C
V
T
4
5
A527D  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
SKIP  
1
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
Follow the steps 1 to 3 on page  
64 to display the Edit menu.  
REV  
FWD  
MY FAVOURITE  
PLAY  
Wait for a moment.  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
STOP  
2
5
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
Select “Edit Title Name” using  
[Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
Press [RETURN ] and then  
[RETURN ] or [STOP C] to  
exit.  
A window for entering the title  
name will appear.  
<e.g. DVD-RW VR mode Playlist>  
Writing on the disc starts.  
It may take a while to write the  
data on a disc.  
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
Playlist - Edit Title Name  
A
a
B
b
2
!
C
c
3
?
3
1
@
15/04/06 19:00 P12 XP  
0:00:59  
3
To enter the title name, refer to  
“Guide to edit title name” on  
page 66.  
character set  
Playlist - Edit Title Name  
A
a
B
b
2
!
C
c
3
?
3
1
@
M
0:00:59  
area for entering title names  
When you finish entering the title  
name, press [ENTER].  
EN 65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing discs (cont’d)  
Guide to edit title name  
Original  
Playlist  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
VCR  
D
V
D
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
C
V
T
A527D  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
1
ENTER  
RETURN  
Select the desired character set  
using [Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
1
1
2
3
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
2
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
2
0
Using the list below as a guide,  
press [the Number buttons]  
repeatedly until the desired let-  
ter appears.  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
STOP  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
Select  
ABC  
abc  
123  
@ ! ?  
Press  
0
<space>  
<space>  
<space>  
0
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
! # $ % & ’( )  
1
1
+ , - . / : ; < = >  
*
? @ [ ] ^ _ { | }  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ABC  
DEF  
abc  
def  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
GHI  
ghi  
JKL  
jkl  
MNO  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
mno  
pqrs  
tuv  
wxyz  
• Characters set will be changed to the “@!?”  
1
automatically if you press  
“ABC” or “abc” mode.  
after you selected the  
Note  
• To delete letters, press  
[CLEAR/C-RESET] repeatedly.  
Press and hold  
[CLEAR/C-RESET] to delete  
all letters.  
• Press [Cursor { / B] to move  
the cursor to the left or right.  
• You can enter up to 30 letters.  
• Unrecognisable characters  
will be replaced with asterisks  
(*). If you delete them,  
adjoining characters may  
change to asterisks (*) or  
other.  
66 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing discs (cont’d)  
Adding or deleting chapter marks  
Original  
Playlist  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
4
SETUP  
DUBBING  
You can add chapter marks to a  
title. After a title is marked with  
chapters, you can use the chapter  
search feature.  
You can set a chapter mark  
anywhere you want. You cannot  
set more than 999 chapter marks  
in the Playlist.  
Select “Add” or “Delete”  
accordingly using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
Confirmation window will appear.  
<e.g. :Add>  
ENTER  
RETURN  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
2
4
1
2
3
PROG.  
Playlist - Chapter Mark - Add  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
Yes  
3
VCR  
D
V
D
7
8
9
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
No  
SKIP  
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
STOP  
Press  
first.  
0
C
V
T
AD  
Chapter  
2/  
2
3
REV  
FWD  
1
PLAY  
F
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
Follow the steps 1 to 3 on page  
64 to display the Edit menu.  
15/04/06 19:00 P12 XP  
STOP  
0:00:59  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
<e.g. :Delete>  
2
Palylist - Chapter Mark - Delete  
Select “Chapter Mark” using  
[Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
Yes  
No  
3
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
Chapter  
2/  
2
Option window will appear.  
<e.g. DVD-RW VR mode Playlist>  
F
Playlist - Chapter Mark  
15/04/06 19:00 P12 XP  
0:00:59  
Add  
3
Delete  
• You cannot delete the first  
chapter of a title.  
Chapter  
2/  
2
15/04/06 19:00 P12 XP  
0:00:59  
3
Use [SKIP H / G],  
[REV E / r], [FWD D / q],  
[PLAY B] and [PAUSE F] to  
find the point where you will  
create a new chapter mark.  
Or, use [SKIP H / G] to find  
a chapter mark that you wish  
to delete.  
Note  
• When the number of chapter  
marks in the Playlist comes to  
999 in total, you cannot add  
any more chapter mark.  
EN 67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing discs (cont’d)  
5
6
Select “Yes” using [Cursor  
Press [RETURN ].  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
7
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
Adding a chapter mark:  
If you select “Add” at step 4, a  
new chapter mark is created at  
the point you specified.  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
Press [RETURN ] again and  
then [RETURN ] or [STOP C]  
to exit.  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Writing on the disc starts.  
It may take a while to write the  
data on a disc.  
<e.g. :Add>  
6
7
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
5
1
2
3
PROG.  
Playlist - Chapter Mark - Add  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
Yes  
3
7
8
9
No  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
Chapter  
2/  
2
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
15/04/06 19:00 P12 XP  
Wait for a moment.  
STOP  
7
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
A chapter mark is added.  
Deleting a chapter mark:  
If you select “Delete” at step 4,  
the chapter mark you selected is  
deleted.  
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
<e.g. :Delete>  
Playlist - Chapter Mark - Delete  
Yes  
3
No  
Chapter  
2/  
2
15/04/06 19:00 P12 XP  
Wait for a moment.  
A chapter mark is deleted.  
68 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing discs (cont’d)  
Setting pictures for thumbnails  
Original  
Playlist  
5
[RETURN  
exit.  
Writing on the disc starts.  
It may take a while to write the  
data on a disc.  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
You can set a picture as a  
thumbnail for each title. This  
helps you to remember the  
content of the title without  
having to play it back. The first  
picture of the title is selected as  
the default.  
Press [RETURN  
and then  
]
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
or [STOP C] to  
]
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
ENTER  
RETURN  
5
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
3
4
1
2
3
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
CR  
D
V
D
6
4
5
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
+
1
0
PLA  
Y
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
STOP  
Press  
first.  
7
8
9
C
V
T
A527D  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
2
1
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
Follow the steps 1 to 3 on page  
64 to display the Edit menu.  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
STOP  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
2
Use [SKIP H / G],  
[REV E / r], [FWD D / q],  
[PLAY B] and [PAUSE F] to  
find the picture you want to set  
as a thumbnail.  
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
3
Select “Index Picture” using  
[Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
Confirmation window will appear.  
<e.g. DVD-RW VR mode Playlist>  
Playlist - Index Picture  
Yes  
3
No  
F
15/04/06 19:00 P12 XP  
0:00:59  
4
Select “Yes” using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
The picture is set as the thumbnail.  
Playlist - Index Picture  
Yes  
3
No  
F
15/04/06 19:00 P12 XP  
Wait for a moment.  
Note  
• If a picture selected as a  
thumbnail is deleted by  
deleting a part of a title, the  
default picture is selected.  
EN 69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing discs (cont’d)  
Deleting a part of a title  
Then use [SKIP H / G],  
[REV E / r], [FWD D / q],  
[PLAY B] and [PAUSE F] again  
to move to the end point, and  
press [ENTER].  
Original  
Playlist  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
You can delete a specific part of  
a title.  
Even when parts of title are  
deleted from the Playlist, the  
original title will remain as it is.  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
Playlist - Scene Delete  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Start  
3
VCR  
D
V
D
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
End  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
+
1
0
2
3
3
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
1
2
3
Preview  
Delete  
PROG.  
C
V
T
A527D  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
1
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
Follow the steps 1 to 3 on page  
64 to display the Edit menu.  
15/04/06 19:00 P12 XP  
0:00:59  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
The cursor will move to “Preview”.  
You can check the preview by  
pressing [ENTER].  
REC/OTR  
2
STOP  
Select “Scene Delete” using  
[Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
The bar at the bottom of the  
screen indicates the total and  
the elapsed time of the title, and  
the area selected for deletion  
is indicated in red during the  
preview.  
Option window will appear.  
<e.g. DVD-RW VR mode Playlist>  
Playlist - Scene Delete  
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
Start  
3
End  
Preview  
Delete  
<Preview>  
Start point End point  
15/04/06 19:00 P12 XP  
0:00:59  
Before  
editing  
3
Use [SKIP H / G],  
Edited  
[REV E / r], [FWD D / q],  
[PLAY B] and [PAUSE F] to  
find the start point, then press  
[ENTER].  
Playlist - Scene Delete  
Start  
3
End  
Preview  
Delete  
15/04/06 19:00 P12 XP  
0:00:59  
70 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing discs (cont’d)  
4
6
[RETURN  
exit.  
Writing on the disc starts.  
It may take a while to write the  
data on a disc.  
Select “Delete” using [Cursor  
Press [RETURN  
and then  
]
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
Confirmation window will appear.  
or [STOP C] to  
]
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
Playlist - Scene Delete  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
Yes  
3
ENTER  
RETURN  
No  
6
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
4
5
1
2
3
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
SKIP  
15/04/06 19:00 P12 XP  
0:00:59  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
5
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
STOP  
Select “Yes” using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
“Are you sure?” will appear.  
Select “Yes” using [Cursor K / L]  
and then press [ENTER].  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
Playlist - Scene Delete  
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
Are you sure?  
3
Yes  
No  
15/04/06 19:00 P12 XP  
Wait for a moment.  
The part of the title is deleted.  
Note  
• When a scene is deleted from  
an Original, the scene on the  
Playlist will also be deleted.  
• You cannot select “Scene  
Delete” if the number of  
chapter marks in the Original  
or Playlist is more than 900.  
• The recordable disc space will  
not increase after deleting a  
part of a title on the Playlist.  
EN 71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing discs (cont’d)  
Dividing a title  
Playlist  
5
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
You can divide a title into two  
new titles.  
Press [RETURN  
to exit.  
or [STOP C]  
]
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
CR  
D
VD  
CM SKIP  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
Writing on the disc starts.  
It may take a while to write the  
data on a disc.  
STOP  
Press  
first.  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
C
V
T
A527D  
ENTER  
RETURN  
1
5
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
3
4
2
1
2
3
Follow the steps 1 to 3 on page  
64 to display the Edit menu.  
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
2
0
REV  
FWD  
Use [SKIP H / G],  
PLAY  
[REV E / r], [FWD D / q],  
[PLAY B] and [PAUSE F] to  
find the point where you wish  
to divide the title.  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
STOP  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
3
Select “Title Dividing” using  
[Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
Confirmation window will appear.  
Playlist - Title Dividing  
Yes  
3
No  
F
15/04/06 19:00 P12 XP  
0:00:59  
4
Select “Yes” using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
The title is divided into two new  
titles with the same title names.  
The thumbnail you set is reset to  
the first picture of each title.  
Playlist - Title Dividing  
Yes  
3
No  
F
Note  
15/04/06 19:00 P12 XP  
Wait for a moment.  
• If a disc contains the  
maximum number of  
recordings (99), you cannot  
divide any titles.  
• You cannot divide the  
titles if the total number of  
the chapters have already  
reached 999.  
72 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing discs (cont’d)  
Combining titles  
Playlist  
4
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
You can combine two titles into a  
single title.  
Select “Yes” using [Cursor  
s / B], then press [ENTER].  
The two titles will combine into a  
single title.  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
C
D
V
D
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
C
V
T
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
AD  
ENTER  
RETURN  
1
2
3
4
Playlist - Title Combining  
5
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
Follow the steps 1 to 3 on page  
64 to display the Edit menu.  
1
2
3
PROG.  
1
2
3
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
1
+
2
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
SKIP  
Yes  
No  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
2
0
REV  
FWD  
Select “Title Combining” using  
[Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
PLAY  
Wait for a moment.  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
STOP  
Title Combining setting window  
will appear.  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
Playlist  
1
Selected title grays out, and the  
frame of the next title becomes  
yellow.  
2
Add New  
Title  
Delete  
Playlist  
Playlist - Title Combining  
15/04/06 19:00 P12 XP  
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
1
2
3
1
+
15/04/06 19:00 P12 XP  
5
Press [RETURN  
to exit.  
or [STOP C]  
]
Writing on the disc starts.  
It may take a while to write the  
data on a disc.  
3
Select another title to combine  
using [Cursor K / L / s / B],  
then press [ENTER].  
Confirmation window will appear.  
Playlist - Title Combining  
1
2
3
1
+
2
Yes  
No  
Note  
• You cannot select the same  
title twice and combine it into  
a single title.  
• If either one of the two  
original titles is deleted, the  
combined new title is also  
deleted.  
EN 73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing discs (cont’d)  
Adding titles to a Playlist  
Playlist  
3
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
You can add a title to the Playlist  
as you wish.  
You can add up to 99 titles to  
a Playlist (as long as the total  
number of the Playlist does not  
exceed 999 chapters).  
Select the desired title using  
[Cursor K / L / s / B], then  
press [ENTER].  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
The added title will appear as the  
final title.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
2
3
4
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
CR  
D
V
D
1
2
3
Playlist - Add New Title  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
PROG.  
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
STOP  
Press  
first.  
6
4
5
C
V
T
A527D  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
1
2
5
3
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
1
0
14/05/06 18:05 P06 SEP  
4
Follow the step 1 on page 64 to  
display the Playlist.  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
Playlist  
STOP  
Wait for a moment.  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
1
2
3
4
15/04/06 19:00 P12 XP  
Press [RETURN  
to exit.  
or [STOP C]  
]
Add New  
Title  
Delete  
Playlist  
Writing on the disc starts.  
It may take a while to write the  
data on a disc.  
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
2
Select “Add New Title” using  
[Cursor K / L / s / B], then  
press [ENTER].  
Next to the final title, “Add New  
Title” “Delete Playlist” menu is  
shown.  
Playlist - Add New Title  
1
2
5
3
14/05/06 18:05 P06 SEP  
4
Note  
• To delete a title from the  
Playlist, refer to “Deleting  
titles” on page 64.  
• To delete all titles in the  
Playlist, refer to “Erasing all  
Playlist” on page 75.  
74 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing discs (cont’d)  
Erasing all Playlist  
Playlist  
3
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
A Playlist can be deleted if it is no  
longer needed.  
Select “Yes” using [Cursor  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
s / B], then press [ENTER].  
VCR  
DVD  
CR  
D
VD  
CM SKIP  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
“Are you sure?” will appear.  
Select “Yes” using [Cursor  
s / B] and then press [ENTER].  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
C
V
T
A527D  
ENTER  
RETURN  
2
3
1
4
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
1
2
3
Follow the step 1 on page 64 to  
display the Playlist.  
Playlist - Delete Playlist  
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
1
2
5
3
7
8
9
Playlist  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
Are you sure?  
4
Yes  
No  
1
2
3
REV  
FWD  
Add New  
Title  
PLAY  
Delete  
Playlist  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
15/04/06 19:00 P12 XP  
REC/OTR  
STOP  
Wait for a moment.  
Add New  
Title  
Delete  
Playlist  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
Playlist is deleted.  
Playlist  
Add New  
Title  
Delete  
Playlist  
2
Select “Delete Playlist” using  
[Cursor K / L / s / B], then  
press [ENTER].  
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
Next to the final title, “Add New  
Title” “Delete Playlist” menu is  
shown.  
4
Confirmation window will appear.  
Press [RETURN  
to exit.  
or [STOP C]  
]
Playlist - Delete Playlist  
Writing on the disc starts.  
It may take a while to write the  
data on a disc.  
1
4
2
3
Yes  
No  
5
Add New  
Title  
Delete  
Playlist  
Note  
• Deleting a Playlist will  
not increase the available  
recording time on the disc.  
• When the disc contains 99  
titles or more, or 999 chapters  
or more, “Add New Title”  
cannot be selected.  
EN 75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing discs (cont’d)  
Setting or releasing the title protection  
Original  
3
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
To prevent the accidental editing,  
or erasing of the titles, you can  
protect them in the Edit menu.  
You can cancel the title  
protection feature after it is  
applied.  
Confirm the indication  
“OFF ON”. Press [ENTER]  
again.  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
• If the title is already protected,  
“ON OFF” will appear. If you  
press [ENTER], the title will be  
released from protection.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
4
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
2
3
1
2
3
PROG.  
VCR  
D
V
D
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
+
1
0
6
P
L
A
Y
4
5
STOP  
Press  
first.  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
C
V
T
AD  
icon will appear on the title  
in the Original list.  
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
1
REV  
FWD  
Follow the steps 1 to 3 on page  
64 to display the Edit menu.  
Original - Protect  
PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
OFF ON  
3
REC/OTR  
STOP  
Original  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
Title Delete  
3
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture  
Protect  
15/04/06 19:00 P12 XP  
Wait for a moment.  
15/04/06 19:00 P12 XP  
0:00:59  
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
4
[RETURN  
exit.  
Writing on the disc starts.  
It may take a while to write the  
data on a disc.  
Press [RETURN  
and then  
]
2
or [STOP C] to  
]
Select “Protect” using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
Original - Protect  
OFF ON  
3
To protect a whole disc  
(DVD-RW VR mode Only):  
Select “Disc Protect OFF ON”  
from the Disc menu, then select  
“Yes”.  
15/04/06 19:00 P12 XP  
0:00:59  
Refer to “Setting a disc to  
protect” on page 40.  
• If the title is protected,  
icon  
will appear in the Original list.  
76 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing discs (cont’d)  
Setting or clearing all chapter marks in one title  
4
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
You can add chapter marks to a  
title. After a title is marked with  
chapters, you can use the chapter  
search feature.  
Select “Yes” using [Cursor  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
Chapter marks are added.  
If you select “OFF” at step 3, all  
the chapter marks are erased.  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
You can specify the interval of  
chapter marks for titles last more  
than 5 minutes.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
5
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
2
3
4
1
2
3
PROG.  
VCR  
D
V
D
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
5
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
6
4
5
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
C
V
T
A527D  
Press [RETURN  
and then  
7
8
9
]
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
[RETURN  
exit.  
or [STOP C] to  
]
0
1
REV  
FWD  
Follow the steps 1 to 3 on page  
64 to display the Edit menu.  
PLAY  
Writing on the disc starts.  
It may take a while to write the  
data on a disc.  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
STOP  
2
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
Select “Chapter Mark” using  
[Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
Option window will appear.  
Title List - Chapter Mark  
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
OFF  
3
5 minutes  
10 minutes  
15 minutes  
30 minutes  
60 minutes  
15/04/06 19:00 P12 XP  
0:00:59  
3
Select the desired interval  
using [Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
Confirmation window will appear.  
Title List - Chapter Mark  
Yes  
3
No  
15/04/06 19:00 P12 XP  
0:00:59  
Note  
• You cannot select a chapter  
mark interval that exceeds  
the length of a title.  
• The length of chapters may  
slightly deviate from the one  
specified at the step 3.  
• A chapter mark may be  
delayed depending on the  
recording content.  
EN 77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Setup menu  
Tour of the Setup menu  
The following table shows the items you can set and their default settings.  
Use the table as a reference for efficient operation.  
Setup  
Items (highlight is the default)  
Contents  
1. Language setting Disc Menu  
Pages 79-80  
Sets the disc menu language.  
English  
French  
Spanish  
Audio  
Sets the audio language.  
Original  
English  
French  
Subtitle  
Sets the subtitle language.  
OFF  
English  
French  
DivX Subtitle  
Sets the DivX subtitle language.  
Sets the On-Screen Display (OSD) language.  
OFF  
English  
French  
2. Display setting  
Pages 80-81  
OSD Language  
English  
Français  
Español  
Angle Icon  
Sets the display or undisplay of  
multi-angle icon in a case the DVD in playback  
mode contains multi-angle scenes.  
ON  
OFF  
Screen Saver  
OFF  
5 minutes  
10 minutes  
Sets the idling time before the screen  
saver starts.  
FL Dimmer  
Digital Out  
Auto  
Sets the front display brightness.  
Bright  
Dark  
PCM  
3. Audio setting  
Pages 81-83  
Sets whether sound recorded at  
96kHz is down sampled to 48kHz or not.  
48kHz  
96kHz  
Dolby Digital  
MPEG  
PCM  
Sets the digital audio output signal  
specification.  
Sets the digital audio output signal  
specification.  
Stream  
PCM  
Stream  
DTS  
ON  
OFF  
Sets whether DTS signal is output or not.  
Dynamic Range  
Control  
Compresses the sound volume range.  
ON  
OFF  
4. Video setting  
Pages 83-84  
Still Mode  
Sets the type of still image in pausing  
playback.  
Auto  
Field  
Frame  
TV System  
Video Out  
Sets the TV system.  
PAL  
Auto  
Sets the video output signal to be fixed  
accordingly to your TV set.  
SCART(RGB)  
Component Progressive (P)  
Component Interlace (I)  
5. Parental setting  
Pages 85-86  
Parental Lock  
Sets the DVD parental control level.  
Sets and changes the password.  
All  
level 8 to 1  
Enter the current  
four-digit password  
(Change password)  
Note  
• Changes you make to the Setup menu remain even after power to the unit is switched off or the disc tray is  
opened or closed.  
78 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Setup menu  
Language setting  
1
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
In stop mode, press [SETUP].  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
1
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
2
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
Select “Playback” using [Cursor K / L], then press [ENTER].  
ENTER  
RETURN  
3
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
2
3
4
1
2
3
Select “Language” using [Cursor K / L], then press [ENTER].  
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
4
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
Select the desired item using [Cursor K / L], then press [ENTER].  
Disc Menu (Default: English)  
Set the Disc Menu language.  
Select a setting using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
Your setting is activated.  
Language  
DVD  
Language - Disc Menu  
DVD  
DVD  
DVD  
DVD  
Disc Menu  
English  
Original  
OFF  
English  
French  
Spanish  
German  
Italian  
Audio  
Subtitle  
DivX Subtitle  
OFF  
Swedish  
Dutch  
Other  
Audio (Default: Original)  
Set the Audio language.  
Select a setting using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
Your setting is activated.  
If “Original” is selected, the audio  
language is the default of the  
inserted disc.  
DVD  
Language  
Language - Audio  
Original  
English  
French  
Spanish  
German  
Italian  
Disc Menu  
English  
Original  
OFF  
Audio  
Subtitle  
DivX Subtitle  
OFF  
Swedish  
Dutch  
Other  
Subtitle (Default: OFF)  
Set the Subtitle language.  
Select a setting using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
Your setting is activated.  
Language  
DVD  
Language - Subtitle  
OFF  
Disc Menu  
English  
Original  
OFF  
English  
French  
Spanish  
German  
Italian  
Audio  
Subtitle  
DivX Subtitle  
OFF  
Swedish  
Dutch  
Other  
DivX Subtitle (Default: OFF)  
Set the DivX Subtitle language.  
Select a setting using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
Your setting is activated.  
Language  
DVD  
Language - DivX Subtitle  
Disc Menu  
English  
Original  
OFF  
OFF  
Audio  
English  
French  
Spanish  
German  
Italian  
Subtitle  
DivX Subtitle  
OFF  
Swedish  
EN 79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Setup menu  
Language setting (cont’d)  
If “Other” is selected, enter the appropriate 4-digit code using  
[the Number buttons].  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
Refer to “Language code” on page 95.  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
5
When you finish entering  
VCR  
DVD  
Language - Subtitle  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
the code, press [ENTER].  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
Code Input  
ENTER  
RETURN  
4
7
4
-
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
1
2
3
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
5
Note  
Press [SETUP] to exit.  
• You can also change or switch off the subtitles on a DVD from the  
disc menu if it is available.  
• Press [CLEAR/C-RESET] or [Cursor s] to erase numbers entered  
incorrectly.  
• You can only select the languages supported by the inserted disc.  
• The Audio Language setting may not be available for some discs.  
Display setting  
1
OPEN/CLOSE  
OPERATE  
In stop mode, press [SETUP].  
SETUP  
EJECT  
DUBBING  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
1
2
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
Select “Display” using [Cursor K / L], then press [ENTER].  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
ENTER  
RETURN  
3
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
Select the desired item using [Cursor K / L], then press [ENTER].  
2
3
1
2
3
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
OSD Language (Default: English)  
Set the OSD language.  
See page 23 for details.  
Select a setting using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
Your setting is activated.  
Display  
VCR DVD  
OSD Language  
VCR DVD  
OSD Language  
Angle Icon  
English  
English  
ON  
Français  
Español  
Deutsch  
Italiano  
Screen Saver  
FL Dimmer  
10 minutes  
Bright  
Svenska  
Nederlands  
Angle Icon (Default: ON)  
Set the angle icon.  
Select a setting using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
Your setting is activated.  
DVD  
DVD  
Display  
Angle Icon  
OSD Language  
Angle Icon  
English  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
Screen Saver  
FL Dimmer  
10 minutes  
Bright  
80 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Setup menu  
Display setting (cont’d)  
Screen Saver (Default: 10 minutes)  
Set the screen saver time delay.  
Screen Saver  
DVD  
Select a setting using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
Your setting is activated.  
DVD  
Display  
OFF  
OSD Language  
Angle Icon  
English  
ON  
5 minutes  
10 minutes  
15 minutes  
30 minutes  
Screen Saver  
FL Dimmer  
10 minutes  
Bright  
FL Dimmer (Default: Bright)  
Set the front panel display brightness.  
FL Dimmer  
VCR DVD  
Display  
VCR DVD  
Select a setting using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
You can choose one from “Auto”,  
“Bright” and “Dark”.  
OSD Language  
Angle Icon  
English  
Auto  
Bright  
Dark  
ON  
Screen Saver  
FL Dimmer  
10 minutes  
Bright  
If “Auto” is selected, the display  
gets dark when the power is off.  
OPEN/CLOSE  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
EJECT  
DUBBING  
4
Press [SETUP] to exit.  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
4
1
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
Audio setting  
Choose the appropriate Audio settings for your audio equipment.  
This will only affect DVDs playback.  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
T-SET TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
1
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
ZOOM  
In stop mode, press [SETUP].  
TOP MENU  
RETURN  
MENU LIST  
2
ENTER  
Select “Playback” using [Cursor K / L], then press [ENTER].  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
2
3
4
1
2
3
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
3
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
Select “Audio” using [Cursor K / L], then press [ENTER].  
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
REV  
FWD  
4
PLAY  
Select the desired item using [Cursor K / L], then press [ENTER].  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
STOP  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
Digital Out  
Set the digital audio output.  
DVD  
Audio  
Audio - Digital Out  
PCM  
DVD  
Select a setting using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
Proceed with either of the  
following steps.  
48kHz  
Stream  
PCM  
Digital Out  
Dolby Digital  
MPEG  
Dynamic Range Control  
ON  
DTS  
OFF  
EN 81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Setup menu  
Audio setting (cont’d)  
PCM sampling (Default : 48kHz)  
Select a setting using [Cursor K / L], then press [ENTER].  
Your setting is activated.  
Digital Out - PCM  
DVD  
48kHz  
96kHz  
48kHz: If your amplifier / decoder is NOT compatible with 96kHz PCM,  
select “48kHz”. Sound recorded at 96kHz is down sampled to  
48kHz.  
96kHz: If your amplifier / decoder is compatible with 96kHz PCM, select  
“96kHz”. Sound is sampled at 96kHz.  
Note  
When playing back a disc with copyright protection or virtual  
surround system on this unit is set to “ON”:  
• Even if you select “96kHz”, the sound is down sampled to 48kHz.  
Dolby Digital conversion (Default : Stream)  
Select a setting using [Cursor K / L], then press [ENTER].  
Digital Out - Dolby Digital  
DVD  
Your setting is activated.  
PCM  
Stream  
PCM:  
Converts the Dolby Digital into PCM (2 channel).  
If your amplifier / decoder is NOT compatible with Dolby  
Digital, set to “PCM”.  
Stream: Outputs Dolby Digital signals.  
If your amplifier / decoder is compatible with Dolby Digital, set  
to “Stream”.  
Note  
When playing back a DVD-RW disc recorded in VR mode:  
• If the audio source on a disc is in Dolby Digital format, set “Dolby  
Digital” to “PCM” so that you can switch to main audio (L), sub  
audio (R), or a combination of both (L / R) using your amplifier /  
decoder.  
Settings for MPEG (Default : PCM)  
Select a setting using [Cursor K / L], then press [ENTER].  
Your setting is activated.  
Digital Out - MPEG  
DVD  
PCM  
Stream  
PCM: Converts MPEG into PCM.  
If your amplifier / decoder is NOT compatible with MPEG, set to  
“PCM”.  
Stream: Outputs MPEG Audio signals.  
If your amplifier / decoder is compatible with MPEG, set to  
“Stream”.  
Settings for DTS (Default : OFF)  
Select a setting using [Cursor K / L], then press [ENTER].  
Your setting is activated.  
Digital Out - DTS  
DVD  
ON  
OFF  
ON:  
Outputs DTS signals.  
If your amplifier / decoder is compatible with DTS, set to “ON”.  
No DTS signal is output.  
OFF:  
If your amplifier / decoder is NOT compatible with DTS, set to  
“OFF”.  
82 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Setup menu  
Audio setting (cont’d)  
Dynamic Range Control (Default: ON)  
Set to “ON” to make the dynamic range narrower.  
Select a setting using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
Your setting is activated.  
Audio - Dynamic Range Control  
DVD  
Audio  
DVD  
ON  
Digital Out  
OFF  
Dynamic Range Control  
ON  
The Dynamic Range Control  
function is effective only with  
analogue audio connection.  
OPEN/CLOSE  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
EJECT  
DUBBING  
5
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
5
Press [SETUP] to exit.  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
Note  
• The Dynamic Range Control function is available only on discs  
recorded in the Dolby Digital format.  
Video setting  
1
In stop mode, press [SETUP].  
OPEN/CLOSE  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
EJECT  
DUBBING  
2
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
1
Select “Playback” using [Cursor K / L], then press [ENTER].  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
3
ENTER  
RETURN  
Select “Video” using [Cursor K / L], then press [ENTER].  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
2
3
4
1
2
3
PROG.  
4
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
Select the desired item using [Cursor K / L], then press [ENTER].  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
Still Mode (Default : Auto)  
Set the type of still image in pausing playback.  
Video  
Video - Still Mode  
Select a setting using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER].  
Your setting will be activated.  
DVD  
DVD  
Still Mode  
TV System  
Video Out  
Auto  
PAL  
Auto  
Field  
Frame  
SCART(RGB)  
Auto : Automatically select the best resolution setting (“Frame” or  
“Field”) based on the data characteristics of the pictures.  
Field : Select “Field” when the pictures are still unstable even if  
“Auto” is selected. “Field” stabilizes the pictures, although  
the picture quality may become coarse due to the limited  
amount of data.  
Frame : Select “Frame” to display relatively motionless pictures in  
higher resolution. “Frame” improves the picture quality,  
although it may unstabilize the pictures due to simultaneous  
output of two Field data.  
Note  
• An individual picture on TV  
screen is called as Frame,  
which consists of two  
separate images called as  
Field. Some pictures may be  
blurred at the “Auto” setting  
in still mode due to their data  
characteristics.  
EN 83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Setup menu  
Video setting (cont’d)  
TV System (Default: PAL)  
Set the TV system.  
Video  
Video - TV System  
DVD  
Select the desired system set-  
ting using [Cursor K / L], then  
press [ENTER].  
DVD  
Still Mode  
TV System  
Video Out  
Auto  
PAL  
PAL  
Auto  
SCART(RGB)  
Note  
• With discs recorded using the  
PAL system, a PAL signal is  
output for viewing on a PAL  
system TV.  
• Discs recorded with the PAL  
system cannot be viewed on  
an NTSC system TV.  
• With discs recorded using the  
NTSC system, an NTSC signal  
is output for viewing on an  
NTSC or Multi system TV.  
• With discs recorded using the  
NTSC system, select PAL to  
view on a PAL system TV.  
PAL:  
Outputs a modified PAL signal for viewing discs recorded  
with the NTSC system on a PAL system TV.  
Auto: Changes the video system (PAL / NTSC) automatically  
according to the format of the inserted disc.  
Video Out (Default: SCART(RGB))  
Sets the video output signal to be fixed accordingly to your TV set.  
Select the desired setting  
using [Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
Video  
DVD  
Video - Video Out  
DVD  
Still Mode  
TV System  
Video Out  
Auto  
PAL  
SCART(RGB)  
Component Progressive (P)  
Component Interlace (I)  
SCART(RGB)  
Note  
• When changing the Video  
Out setting (SCART(RGB),  
Component Interlace (I) or  
Component Progressive (P)),  
connect to a VIDEO jack or  
an S-VIDEO jack on the TV.  
If the setting is changed, for  
example, to SCART(RGB) while  
the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
jacks are used to connect  
to the TV, a distorted video  
signal may be output.  
Refer to page 15 for more details.  
If you select “SCART (RGB)” or “Component Interlace (I)”, proceed to step 5.  
SCART(RGB):  
Select SCART(RGB)if your TV has a scart terminal and  
connected to it.  
Component Progressive (P):  
If your TV is compatible with progressive scanning, select  
“Component Progressive (P)” and make sure the connection  
indicated by each jacks (Y / PB / PR) properly.  
• When “Component  
Progressive (P)” is selected,  
“P.SCAN” will appear on the  
front panel display.  
Video - Video Out  
Video - Video Out  
DVD  
DVD  
Activating progressive scan:  
Check your TV has progressive scan  
and connect with component video cable.  
Confirm again to use progressive scan.  
If Picture is good, Select “Yes”.  
NOTE: If there is no picture or picture is  
distorted after selecting “Yes”,  
Yes  
No  
Wait about 15 seconds for auto recovery.  
Yes  
Activate?  
No  
Select “Yes” using [Cursor  
Select “Yes” using [Cursor  
K / L], then press [ENTER]  
within 15 seconds.  
s / B], then press [ENTER].  
Component Interlace (I):  
If your TV that have component jacks, select “Component  
Interlace (I)” and make sure the connection indicated by each  
jacks (Y / CB / CR) properly.  
OPEN/CLOSE  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
EJECT  
DUBBING  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
5
5
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
Press [SETUP] to exit.  
84 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Setup menu  
DVD-Videos Parental Lock level  
Some DVD-Videos feature a Parental Lock function. If the rating of the  
inserted disc exceeds the level you set, playback will stop. You must  
enter a password before the disc will be played back. This feature  
prevents your children from viewing inappropriate material.  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
1
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
1
ENTER  
RETURN  
In stop mode, press [SETUP].  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
2
3
1
2
3
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
2
4
5
6
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
Select “Playback” using [Cursor K / L], then press [ENTER].  
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
3
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
Select “Parental Lock” using [Cursor K / L], then press [ENTER].  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
STOP  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
Note  
• The parental lock function may not be available on some discs.  
• It may be difficult to determine if some DVDs support the parental  
lock function. Be sure to confirm that the parental lock function  
operates in the way that you have set.  
• Record the password in case you forget it.  
Parental Lock (Default: All)  
Set the Parental Lock level.  
Change the Parental Lock level  
Playback  
DVD  
Parental Lock  
DVD  
using [Cursor K / L], then press  
[ENTER].  
Audio  
All  
8
Video  
7
Language  
Parental Lock  
DivX® VOD  
Proceed with either of the  
following steps.  
6
All  
5
4
3
2
1
All:  
8:  
All parental locks are cancelled.  
DVD software of any grade (adult / general / children) can be  
played back.  
7 to 2: Only DVD software intended for general use and children can  
be played back.  
1:  
Only DVD softwares intended for children can be played back.  
EN 85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Setup menu  
DVD-Videos Parental Lock level (cont’d)  
A password is not yet set  
Select “Yes” using [Cursor K / L],  
DVD  
Parental Lock  
Parental Lock  
DVD  
then enter a new password using  
[the Number buttons], then  
press [ENTER].  
Change Password?  
Yes  
No  
Password Input  
-
-
-
-
Yes  
Your setting is activated.  
If you select “No”, proceed to step 4.  
A password is already set  
DVD  
Parental Lock  
DVD  
Parental Lock  
Parental Lock  
DVD  
Change Password?  
Yes  
No  
Password Input  
Password Input  
Yes  
-
-
-
-
* * * *  
Enter the current password  
using [the Number buttons].  
Change the password.  
Select “Yes” using [Cursor K / L], then enter a new password  
using [the Number buttons], then press [ENTER].  
Your setting is activated.  
If you press [ENTER] without entering a password, you can set up  
without a password.  
OPEN/CLOSE  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
EJECT  
DUBBING  
4
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
4
Press [SETUP] to exit.  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
ENTER  
RETURN  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
1
2
3
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
STOP  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
Note  
• Press [CLEAR/C-RESET] to erase numbers entered incorrectly.  
• If you forget your password or you want to clear all settings in Parental Lock, enter [4], [7], [3], [7] using  
[the Number buttons] at the option window. Your password is cleared and parental levels are set to  
“All”.  
86 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VCR functions  
Playback  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
3
DUBBING  
VCR  
DVD  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
1
5
STOP  
Press  
first.  
6
During playback, press [PAUSE  
F].  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
C
N
TN  
A
527D  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
Playback will be paused and  
sound will be muted.  
1
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
Press [ OPERATE] to turn on  
the unit.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
4
To play back a tape, turn on the  
TV and be sure to select the input  
to which the unit is connected.  
1
2
3
PROG.  
Press [PLAY B] to resume play-  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
back.  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
5
2
REV  
FWD  
2
4
Press [STOP C] to stop play-  
Insert a prerecorded tape, then  
press [PLAY B] to begin play-  
back.  
PLAY  
back.  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
STOP  
6
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
Press [OPEN/CLOSE EJECT A]  
to eject the tape.  
3
Note  
• When a tape without record tab is inserted, the unit will start play-  
back automatically.  
• Tracking will be automatically adjusted upon playback. To adjust  
the tracking manually, press [PROG.  
/
].  
• S-VHS videotapes are not available on this unit.  
Recording and One-touch Timer Recording (OTR)  
Basic Recording  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
1
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
2
Before recording, make sure:  
• The desired channel is selected  
by pressing [the Number  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
2
5
Select the recording mode  
using [REC MODE].  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
• The desired recording mode  
is selected in SP (standard  
playback) or LP (long playback)  
mode by pressing [REC MODE].  
buttons] or [PROG.  
/
] on  
ENTER  
RETURN  
the remote control.  
• There is a tape with a record  
tab in the unit.  
• The desired recording mode  
is selected in SP (standard  
playback) or LP (long playback)  
mode by pressing [REC MODE]  
on the remote control.  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
1
2
3
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
3
4
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
3
0
REV  
FWD  
Select the desired channel to  
PLAY  
record using [PROG.  
/
] or  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
[the Number buttons].  
STOP  
Recording mode  
Type of tape  
SP mode  
Recording/Playback Time  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
4
E60  
E120  
E180  
1hour  
2hours  
2hours  
4hours  
3hours  
6hours  
Press [VCR REC/OTR I] to start  
recording.  
LP mode  
• Refer to pages 31-35 for  
instructions on Timer Recording  
and Satellite Link.  
To temporarily stop recording or  
to resume it, press [PAUSE F].  
After the unit has been in pause  
mode for 5 minutes, it will stop  
automatically to protect the  
tape and the video head from  
damage.  
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
VCR  
DVD  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
C
N
T
N
A
527D  
1
Turn on the unit and insert a  
recordable tape.  
Accidental erasure prevention  
To prevent accidental record-  
ing on a recorded cassette,  
remove its record tab. To  
record on it later, cover the  
hole with cellophane tape.  
5
Make sure that the TV input is set  
on the unit.  
Press [STOP C] when the  
recording is completed.  
Erase-protection tab  
EN 87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VCR functions  
Recording and One-touch Timer Recording (OTR) (cont’d)  
One-touch Timer Recording  
• When the unit reaches the  
specified time, it will be turned  
off automatically.  
• To change the recording  
length during One-touch Timer  
Recording, press  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
DUBBING  
This feature allows you to set  
the recording length simply by  
pressing [VCR REC/OTR I].  
1
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
2
CM SKIP  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
VC
DVD  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
C
N
T
N
D  
ENTER  
RETURN  
[VCR REC/OTR I] repeatedly  
until the desired length appears.  
• To cancel One-touch Timer  
Recording within the specified  
time, press [STOP C].  
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
1
2
3
1
PROG.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
3
4
Turn on the unit and insert a  
recordable tape.  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
Make sure that the TV input is set  
on the unit.  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
2
STOP  
Select the recording mode  
using [REC MODE]. (See page  
87.)  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
3
Select the desired channel to  
VCR/DVD RECORDER  
COMBINATION  
NB203ED  
record using [PROG.  
/
] or  
[the Number buttons].  
4
Press [VCR REC/OTR I] repeat-  
edly until the desired recording  
time (30 minutes to 8 hours)  
appears on the TV screen.  
One-touch Timer Recording will  
start.  
0:30  
(Normal Recording)  
1:00  
8:00  
7:30  
Note  
• The remaining recording time will appear on the TV screen during  
One-touch Timer Recording. Press [DISPLAY] to see it on the TV  
screen.  
• If VCR One-touch Timer Recording is completed during DVD  
playback or recording, the VCR will be in stop mode and the DVD  
keeps the current mode.  
• You cannot use the pause function during One-touch Timer  
Recording.  
• When One-touch Timer Recording is finished and the power  
is turned off, the unit will switch to the timer-standby mode  
automatically if a timer recording has been programmed.  
Press [T-SET] to cancel the timer-standby mode to use the unit  
continuously.  
88 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VCR functions  
Search  
Index search  
3
VCR  
DVD  
OPEN/CLOSE  
EJECT  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
DUBBING  
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
Press [FWD D / q] or [REV  
E / r] to start index search.  
If you want to go in the forward  
C
N
N  
D  
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
1
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
direction, press [FWD D / q]  
If you want to go in the reverse  
direction, press [REV E / r]  
After index search, the VCR will  
play the tape automatically.  
.
Press [SEARCH] so that the  
index search menu appears.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
.
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
1
2
3
PROG.  
2
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
6
4
5
Enter the number of record-  
ings you wish to skip using [the  
Number buttons] within 30  
seconds.  
2
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
SKIP  
CURRENT PROGRAM  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
0
Beginning  
of tape  
End  
of tape  
REV  
FWD  
Pro.1 Pro.2 Pro.3 Pro.4 Pro.5  
02 01 01 02 03  
PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
INDEX 03  
REC/OTR  
3
1
STOP  
INDEX MARK  
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
Note  
• This function is not available during recording.  
• Every time a tape is recorded, an index mark is written on the tape.  
• You can make the index mark up to 20.  
Time search  
OPEN/CLOSE  
OPERATE  
SETUP  
EJECT  
DUBBING  
3
T-SET  
ZOOM  
TIMER PROG. REC MODE RAPID PLAY  
This feature allows you to go  
to a specific point on a tape by  
entering the exact amount of  
time you wish to skip in order to  
reach the point.  
Press [FWD D / q] or [REV  
E / r] to start time search.  
If you want to go in the forward  
direction, press [FWD D / q]  
If you want to go in the reverse  
VCR  
DVD  
CM SKIP  
TOP MENU  
MENU LIST  
ENTER  
RETURN  
.
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
VCR  
DVD  
1
2
3
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
PROG.  
+
1
0
direction, press [REV E / r]  
After time search, the unit will  
play the tape automatically.  
.
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
6
4
5
C
N
T
N
A
527D  
2
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
7
8
9
SKIP  
CLEAR/C-RESET SPACE  
DISPLAY  
1
0
Press [SEARCH] repeatedly so  
that the Time search menu  
appears.  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
VCR  
DVD  
REC/OTR  
REC/OTR  
3
1
STOP  
2
REPEAT  
AUDIO SEARCH SLOW  
PAUSE  
Enter your desired time to skip  
using [the Number buttons]  
within 30 seconds.  
Note  
TIME 2:50  
• This function is not available during recording.  
• Press [STOP C] to stop the search.  
If the tape reaches the end during the search, this unit will cancel it  
and rewind the tape.  
• You can set the time up to 9:59.  
EN 89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VCR functions  
Other operations  
VCR  
DVD  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
+
1
0
P
L
A
Y
STOP  
Press  
first.  
V
R
D
C
I
527A
To cue or review picture during playback (Picture Search):  
Press [FWD D / q] or [REV E / r] during playback.  
Press it again and the unit will search in super high speed.  
To freeze the picture on TV screen during playback (Still mode):  
Press [PAUSE F]. Each time you press the button, the picture will be  
forwarded frame by frame.  
If the picture begins to vibrate vertically during the still mode,  
Note  
stabilize the picture by pressing the [PROG.  
/
].  
• Still / Slow / Pause mode will  
be automatically cancelled  
after 5 minutes to prevent  
damage to the tape and the  
video head.  
If the picture is distorted or rolling vertically, adjust the vertical hold  
control on your TV, if equipped.  
Counter Reset:  
Press [CLEAR/C-RESET].  
To play back in slow motion:  
• To return to play back from  
the Picture Search / Still / Slow  
mode, press [PLAY B].  
Press [SLOW ] during playback or the still mode.  
If the noise bars appear on the TV screen, you can reduce it by  
pressing [PROG.  
/
].  
Hi-Fi Stereo Sound System  
This unit will record and playback Hi-Fi stereo sound. In addition, it  
has an AV2 and NICAM stereo sound decoder.  
This unit will receive stereo and bilingual broadcasts and it is possible  
to record in several ways and to play back the sound.  
Selecting the Sound Mode  
You can select each mode by pressing [AUDIO] on the remote  
control. Each mode is indicated on the TV screen as following.  
• During playback of the recorded tape in Hi-Fi mode  
• During reception of stereo broadcasts  
Display on the  
Mode  
Audio output  
TV screen  
STEREO  
LEFT  
Stereo  
L
R
Stereo  
L audio from both speakers  
R audio from both speakers  
Monaural  
RIGHT  
-None-  
Normal  
Note  
• If you play back non-Hi-Fi  
tapes, the unit will play back  
automatically in monaural  
even if you select any mode.  
• If the stereo signal becomes  
weak, the broadcast is  
automatically recorded in  
monaural.  
• During reception of bilingual broadcasts  
Display on the  
TV screen  
Mode  
Audio output  
Main  
Sub  
Main audio from both speakers  
Sub audio from both speakers  
Main  
Sub  
• Main audio from the left speaker  
• Sub audio from the right speaker  
Main / Sub  
Main / Sub  
90 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
Troubleshooting  
Before requesting service for this unit, check the table below for a possible cause of the problem you are experiencing.  
Some simple checks or a minor adjustment by you may eliminate the problem and restore correct operation.  
Symptom  
Remedy  
VCR / DVD  
The power does not turn on.  
• Check the mains cable is connected securely.  
• Check the breaker (in case of power failure).  
Any of the buttons on the front  
panel does not function.  
• Check if the Child Lock is activated. (See page 10.)  
There is no picture.  
• Check signal cables are connected securely.  
• Check if a connecting cable is damaged.  
• Check connections to your TV. (See pages 14-15.)  
• Switch the input selector on your TV (to “AV1” for example) until a picture  
appears on the screen.  
The picture on your TV is distorted • Turn the unit off if the unit is not being used.  
during the unit is turned on. • Change the channel on this unit.  
TV programme picture does not fill • Set channels with “Auto Tuning” from the Setup menu. (See page 19.)  
the screen.  
• Select the channel of a TV programme using [PROG.  
/
].  
TV programme pictures are  
distorted.  
• Adjust the direction of the TV antenna.  
• Adjust the picture. (See the TV instruction manual.)  
• Place the antenna and the TV farther apart.  
• Separate any bunched antenna cables and the TV.  
TV channel cannot be changed.  
• Switch the TV input.  
• Check if the antenna cable is connected correctly. (See pages 14-15.)  
The channel cannot be changed  
from the channel you are recording.  
• Set the TV input to “TV”.  
Playback picture is distorted.  
• Do not bring equipment that may cause electrical interference, such as a  
cellular phone, near the unit.  
The playback picture or TV  
programme from equipment  
connected through the unit is  
distorted.  
• If a DVD player, VCR or tuner is connected to your TV via the unit, the  
copyprotection signal applied to some programmes could affect picture  
quality. Disconnect the playback equipment in question and connect it  
directly to your TV.  
Nothing was recorded even  
though you set the timer setting  
correctly.  
• There was a power failure during recording.  
• The unit’s internal clock stopped due to a power failure that lasted for more  
than 1 hour.  
• Reset the clock. (See page 22.)  
• Unplug the mains cable from the AC outlet and plug it in again.  
• The programme contains copy protection signals that restrict copying.  
The timer setting overlapped with another setting that was set later or has priority.  
Timer recording is not completed  
• The timer setting overlapped with another setting that has priority. (See page 33.)  
or did not start from the beginning. • There was not enough disc or tape space.  
There is no sound.  
• The disc is dirty or flawed.  
• Check if all cables are connected securely.  
• Check if a connecting cable is damaged.  
• Check the connections to the amplifier input.  
• Check if the input source setting on the amplifier is correct.  
• Check if the unit is in Pause mode or in Slow-motion Playback mode.  
• Check if the unit is in Fast Forward or Fast Reverse mode.  
Timer recording is not possible.  
• Make sure icon appears on the front panel display of this unit. If not, press  
[T-SET].  
The remote control does not  
function.  
• Batteries are exhausted.  
• There are obstacles between the remote control and the unit.  
• The remote control is too far from the unit.  
• There are no batteries in the remote control.  
• The unit is not turned on.  
• The remote control is not pointed at the remote sensor on the unit.  
• Check if the Child Lock is activated. (See page 10.)  
• Press [VCR] or [DVD], whichever you need. Then, try again.  
EN 91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
Troubleshooting (cont’d)  
Symptom  
Remedy  
VCR / DVD  
The unit does not operate  
correctly.  
• If static electricity or anything else causes the unit to operate abnormally,  
unplug the mains cable and plug it in again.  
DV signal cannot be input.  
• Before connection, turn on the power supplies for both this unit and the DVC,  
and make sure that these units have stopped.  
• Only a “DVC-SD” signal can be input from the DVC to this unit. Other types of  
signals are not supported.  
• Do not connect any device other than the DVC. Even if a recorder or PC with  
another DV terminal is connected, the DV function will not operate.  
• If the DVC is not recognized after connection, turn off the power supply for  
the unit and re-connect the DVC.  
The DVC cannot be operated with  
this unit.  
• Signal input or DVC operation from this unit may be disabled depending on  
the type of DVC.  
• If a DVC signal cannot be input, use an external input (AV2 / AV3) for analog  
connection via AV cables.  
• DVC control may be disabled depending on the type of DVC, even in playback  
mode other than camera mode. In this case, switch to DVD control and  
execute the normal recording procedure while operating the DVC.  
Certain functions of the unit  
cannot operate.  
• Some functions may not operate depending on the type of DVC. For  
example, if the DVC does not support slow playback mode, the slow playback  
function is disabled.  
• With AV4 (DV input), the disc display menu does not appear unless disc  
playback is executed.  
DV audio signal cannot be  
switched.  
• For recording with the DVC, the recording audio signal can be set to 12 bits  
or 16 bits. However, when 16-bit recording mode is selected, audio signal  
cannot be switched. To record an audio signal, set it to 12 bits.  
DVD  
There is no picture.  
• If the Setup menu display appears, press [SETUP] or [RETURN ] to turn off  
the display.  
Picture noise appears.  
• The disc is dirty or flawed.  
• If the unit is connected to your TV via a VCR, or if it is connected to a  
combination TV / VIDEO player, the copy-protection signal applied to some  
DVD programmes could affect picture quality. If you still experience this  
problem even when you connect the unit directly to your TV, try connecting  
the unit to your TV’s S-VIDEO input.  
Sound is noisy.  
• The disc is dirty or flawed.  
The unit does not play back the  
disc.  
• No disc is inserted.  
• A blank disc is inserted.  
• The disc is upside down. Insert the disc with the labelled side facing up.  
• The disc is not correctly inserted.  
• The unit cannot play back certain discs (such as a CD-ROM). (See page 42.)  
The region codes on the DVD-Video and the unit are not matched. (See page 42.)  
• Moisture has condensed inside the unit. Remove the disc and leave the unit  
turned on for about two hours until the moisture evaporates. (See page 2.)  
• The unit cannot play back the disc if it was recorded on another recorder and  
not finalised.  
There is no sound.  
• If the audio signal is not output from the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL /  
COAXIAL) jacks, check the Audio setting. (See pages 81-83.)  
Playback image freezes for a  
moment.  
• During the playback of a two layered disc, the picture may freeze for a  
moment while playback switches from the first to the second layer. This is not  
a malfunction.  
The unit does not play back the  
disc from the beginning.  
• Resume playback is activated. (See page 49.) Press [STOP C] twice.  
• You have inserted a disc whose Title menu or DVD menu automatically  
appears on the TV screen when it is first inserted.  
The unit starts playing back the  
disc automatically.  
• The DVD-Video features an auto playback function.  
92 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
Troubleshooting (cont’d)  
Symptom  
Remedy  
DVD  
Some functions such as Stop,  
Search, or Slow-motion Playback  
cannot be performed.  
• Depending on the disc, you may not be able to perform some of those  
operations. See the instruction manual supplied with the disc.  
The language for the sound track  
cannot be changed.  
• Multilingual tracks are not recorded on the DVD-Video, DVD-RW or DVD-R  
being played back.  
• The DVD-Video prohibits the changing of the language for the sound track.  
• Try changing the language using the DVD-Video menu.  
The subtitle language cannot be  
changed or turned off.  
• Multilingual subtitles are not recorded on the DVD-Video.  
• The DVD-Video prohibits changing the subtitles.  
• Try changing the subtitles using the DVD-Video menu.  
Angles cannot be changed.  
• You can change the angle only if the disc contains multi-angle scene. Angles  
can be changed only when the multi-angle scene appears on the screen.  
• The DVD-Video prohibits changing angles.  
• Try changing the angle using the DVD-Video menu.  
Recording does not start  
immediately after pressing  
[DVD REC/OTR I].  
• An unused DVD-RW or DVD-R was inserted. It takes a while for the unit to  
automatically format a DVD-RW.  
Recording does not stop  
immediately after you press  
[STOP C].  
• It will take a few seconds for the unit to send data to disc before recording  
can stop.  
The disc tray does not open when  
you press  
[OPEN/CLOSE EJECT A].  
• It may take a few seconds for the disc tray to open after you have recorded or  
edited a disc.  
• This is because the unit is sending data to the disc.  
“Repairing” appears on the display. • If a power failure occurs or the mains cable is unplugged during recording,  
finalising, formatting or editing (even after “Wait for a moment.” message  
disappeared), a repairing process will begin automatically when the unit is  
turned on next time. It may take several minutes up to about four hours.  
Repairing  
In a case you intend to cancel the  
Repairing process.  
• If you intend to cancel the Repairing process, press [OPEN/CLOSE EJECT A]  
on the front panel, then select “Yes” with [Cursor s / B] and press [ENTER].  
After that, the disc tray will automatically open. In case the Repairing  
process is cancelled, the disc MAY NOT work.  
Do you want to cancel a repairing process ?  
When selecting “Yes”, the disc may not be  
usable.  
Yes  
No  
Repairing  
VCR  
Picture noise appears.  
• Adjust tracking control for better picture by pressing [PROG.  
you are playing back a video tape.  
/
] while  
• Head cleaning for VCR may be necessary.  
Refer to “AUTO HEAD CLEANING” on page 4.  
The unit does not play back the  
tape.  
• No video tape is inserted.  
Recording does not start  
immediately after pressing  
[VCR REC/OTR I].  
• Make sure the video tape has a record tab when you record to a video tape. If  
needed, cover the hole with cellophane tape.  
The remote control does not  
function.  
• Check if a video tape is in the unit. Press [VCR]. Then, try again.  
• Check if the Child Lock is activated. (See page 10.)  
The motor rotates even when  
playback / recording is stopped.  
• The motor may rotate for the duration of approximately 5 minutes for  
efficient operation. This is not a malfunction.  
* If the above remedies do not solve the problem, please call an authorised service centre.  
EN 93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
Troubleshooting (cont’d)  
Error message  
Cause  
Solution  
Disc Error  
• An unplayable disc is inserted in the  
unit.  
• The disc is upside down.  
• Insert a standard disc shown in  
“Playable discs”. (See page 42.)  
• Insert the disc with the labelled side  
facing up.  
— Please eject the disc. —  
Playback feature may not be available on  
this Disc.  
Region Error  
— Please eject the disc. —  
Playback is not authorised in your region.  
• Playback is not authorised in the region  
of the DVD-Video that you inserted in  
the unit.  
• Insert a DVD-Video with region codes 4  
or ALL.  
Parental Lock On  
The current selected parental level  
prohibits playback.  
The current selected parental level in the  
Setup menu prohibits playback.  
• Check the “Parental Lock” setting. (See  
pages 85-86.)  
Recording Error  
This programme is not allowed to be  
recorded.  
• The recording function encountered a  
copy prohibited programme.  
• Original source is in NTSC system.  
• You cannot record copy prohibited  
programmes.  
Recording Error  
This programme is not recordable in  
Video mode.  
• You are trying to record a copy-once  
programme onto a DVD-RW disc in  
Video mode.  
• Record the programme onto a DVD-RW  
disc in VR mode.  
• Reformat to “VR mode”. (See page 28.)  
Recording Error  
Cannot record on this disc.  
• You are trying to record onto a disc that  
is unrecordable, or the disc status does  
not satisfy recording requirements.  
• The disc is dirty.  
• Insert a recordable disc, and ensure  
the disc status satisfies the recording  
requirements. (See page 24.)  
• Clean the disc with a cleaning cloth.  
• Replace the disc.  
• The disc is damaged.  
Recording Error  
This programme is not allowed to be  
recorded on this disc.  
• You are trying to record a copy-once  
programme onto a DVD-RW disc that is  
not compatible with CPRM.  
• Insert a ver. 1.1 or ver. 1.2 DVD-RW disc  
(compatible with CPRM).  
Recording Error  
This disc is protected and not recordable.  
• You are trying to record onto a disc that  
is set as protected in the Setup menu.  
• Remove the disc protect setting in the  
Setup menu. (See page 40.)  
Recording Error  
• You are trying to record onto a disc that  
has no space for recording.  
• Insert a recordable disc with enough  
recording space.  
• Delete unnecessary original titles. (See  
page 64.)  
Disc is full.  
(No area for new recording)  
Recording Error  
• You are trying to record onto a disc on  
which the number of recorded titles has  
reached the maximum (99).  
• Delete unnecessary original titles. (See  
page 64.)  
You cannot record more than 99 titles on  
one disc.  
(The maximum is 99)  
Recording Error  
• You are trying to record onto a disc on  
which the number of recorded chapters  
has reached the maximum (999).  
• Delete unnecessary chapter mark from  
an Original list. (See pages 67-68, 77.)  
You cannot record more than 999  
chapters on one disc.  
(The maximum is 999)  
Recording Error  
You cannot record on this disc as Control  
Information is full.  
• This disc has no space to write Control  
Information when recording or deleting  
contents.  
• Delete unnecessary titles. (See page 64.)  
• When editing has been repeatedly  
performed, the control information  
area may become full even though the  
recording area has enough space.  
Recording Error  
You cannot record on this disc as Power  
Calibration Area is full.  
• When recordings are performed  
repeatedly onto an unstable disc, this  
area may become full.  
• Insert a new disc.  
• Every time you insert a disc for  
recording, part of the disc’s working  
area will be used.  
• If you repeat these frequently, it will be  
used up quicker and you may not be  
able to record full 99 titles.  
Recording Error  
This disc is already finalised.  
• You are trying to record onto a disc that  
is already finalised.  
• Release the finalising for the disc. (See  
pages 40-41.)  
* If you are still having trouble with the unit after checking all the Troubleshooting points, write down the  
error code and the error description and consult your dealer or an authorised service centre.  
94 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
Language code  
Language  
Abkhazian  
Afar  
Afrikaans  
Albanian  
Amharic  
Arabic  
Armenian  
Assamese  
Aymara  
Azerbaijani  
Bashkir  
Code  
4748  
4747  
4752  
6563  
4759  
4764  
5471  
4765  
4771  
4772  
4847  
5167  
4860  
5072  
4854  
4855  
4864  
4853  
5971  
4851  
5759  
4947  
7254  
4961  
5464  
4965  
5047  
6058  
5160  
5161  
5166  
5261  
5256  
5255  
5264  
5271  
5358  
5747  
5051  
5158  
5758  
5360  
5367  
5447  
5569  
5455  
Language  
Code  
5467  
5565  
5560  
5547  
5551  
5557  
5347  
5566  
5647  
5669  
5760  
5765  
5757  
6469  
5771  
6460  
5761  
5767  
5861  
5847  
5868  
5860  
5866  
5957  
5953  
5965  
5958  
5966  
5955  
5964  
5961  
5960  
6047  
6051  
6061  
6149  
6164  
6159  
6247  
6265  
5247  
6258  
6266  
6367  
6459  
6461  
Language  
Russian  
Samoan  
Sangho  
Sanskrit  
Scots Gaelic  
Serbian  
Serbo-Croatian  
Sesotho  
Setswana  
Shona  
Sindhi  
Singhalese  
Siswat  
Slovak  
Slovenian  
Somali  
Code  
6467  
6559  
6553  
6547  
5350  
6564  
6554  
6566  
6660  
6560  
6550  
6555  
6565  
6557  
6558  
6561  
5165  
6567  
6569  
6568  
6658  
6653  
6647  
6666  
6651  
6654  
4861  
6655  
6661  
6665  
6664  
6657  
6669  
6757  
6764  
6772  
6855  
6861  
4971  
6961  
7054  
5655  
7161  
7267  
Hungarian  
Icelandic  
Indonesian  
Interlingua  
Interlingue  
Inupiak  
Irish  
Italian  
Japanese  
Javanese  
Kannada  
Kashmiri  
Kazakh  
Kinyarwanda  
Kirghiz  
Kirundi  
Korean  
Kurdish  
Laothian  
Latin  
Latvian; Lettish  
Lingala  
Lithuanian  
Macedonian  
Malagasy  
Malay  
Malayalam  
Maltese  
Maori  
Marathi  
Moldavian  
Mongolian  
Nauru  
Nepali  
Norwegian  
Occitan  
Oriya  
Oromo (Afan)  
Panjabi  
Pashto; Pushto  
Persian  
Polish  
Portuguese  
Quechua  
Rhaeto-Romance  
Romanian  
Basque  
Bengali;Bangla  
Bhutani  
Bihari  
Bislama  
Breton  
Bulgarian  
Burmese  
Byelorussian  
Cambodian  
Catalan  
Chinese  
Corsican  
Croatian  
Czech  
Danish  
Dutch  
English  
Esperanto  
Estonian  
Faroese  
Fiji  
Finnish  
French  
Spanish  
Sundanese  
Swahili  
Swedish  
Tagalog  
Tajik  
Tamil  
Tatar  
Telugu  
Thai  
Tibetan  
Tigrinya  
Tonga  
Tsonga  
Turkish  
Turkmen  
Twi  
Ukrainian  
Urdu  
Frisian  
Uzbek  
Galician  
Georgian  
German  
Greek  
Greenlandic  
Guarani  
Gujarati  
Hausa  
Vietnamese  
Volapuk  
Welsh  
Wolof  
Xhosa  
Yiddish  
Yoruba  
Zulu  
Hebrew  
Hindi  
EN 95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
Glossary  
Analogue audio  
DTS  
Region code  
(Digital Theater System)  
DTS is a Multi-channel surround  
sound system, but it is different  
An electrical signal that directly  
represents sound. In contrast,  
digital audio can also be an  
Regions associate discs and  
players with particular areas of  
the world. This unit will only play  
back discs that have compatible  
region codes. You can find the  
region code of your unit by  
looking on the rear panel. Some  
discs are compatible with more  
than one region (or all regions).  
electrical signal, but is an indirect from Dolby Digital. Both formats  
representation of sound. See also were developed by Digital  
Digital audio.  
Theater Systems, Inc.  
Aspect ratio  
Finalise  
The width of a TV screen relative  
to its height. Conventional TVs  
are 4:3 (i.e., the screen is almost  
square). Widescreen models are  
16:9 (the screen is almost twice  
as wide as its height).  
To make DVDs that have been  
recorded playable in DVD players.  
It is possible to finalise DVD-RW/-R  
discs with this unit.  
Sampling frequency  
The rate at which sound is  
measured by a specified interval  
to turn it into digital audio  
data. The number of samples  
in one second is defined as the  
sampling frequency. The higher  
the rate is, the better the possible  
sound quality.  
JPEG  
(Joint Photographic Experts  
Group)  
JPEG is a method of compressing  
still image files. You can copy  
JPEG files on CD-RW/-R discs  
from a computer and play back  
the files on this unit.  
Chapter  
Just as a book is split up into  
several chapters, a title on a  
DVD disc is usually divided into  
chapters. See also Title.  
S-Video output  
Video is output as the individual  
signals of colour(C) and  
luminance(Y), so a higher-quality  
picture will be displayed.  
CM SKIP  
MP3  
This unit can skip TV commercials  
during DVD Video playback.  
Once [CM SKIP] is pressed, the  
start point will be set forward 30  
seconds and playback resume  
automatically. (You can press  
[CM SKIP] up to 6 times.)  
CPRM  
(Content Protection for  
Recordable Media)  
CPRM is a scrambling copy  
protection system for the  
protection of “copy-once”  
broadcast programmes (e.g.  
some satellite broadcasts).  
(MPEG Audio Layer 3)  
MP3 is a method of compressing  
files. You can copy MP3 files on  
CD-RW/-R discs from a computer  
and play back the files on this  
unit.  
PBC (Video CD only)  
(Playback Control)  
This function enables you to play  
back interactive software using a  
menu screen. See also Title.  
Title  
(DVD)  
A collection of chapters on a  
DVD. See also chapter.  
(Video CD)  
The contents of a Video CD.  
When playing back a Video CD  
with the PBC function, the Title  
menu will appear automatically.  
PCM  
(Pulse Code Modulation)  
PCM is a format that converts  
audio into digital data. It is  
mainly used for Audio CDs and  
DAT. This unit can play back  
sounds as realistic as possible  
by converting even compressed  
Dolby Digital and MPEG audio to  
PCM.  
Track  
Audio CDs and Video CDs use  
tracks to divide the contents of a  
disc. The DVD equivalent is called  
a chapter. See also Chapter.  
Digital audio  
An indirect representation of  
sound using numbers. During  
recording, the sound is measured  
at discrete intervals (44 or 100  
times a second for CD audio) by  
an analogue-todigital converter,  
generating a stream of numbers.  
On playback, a digital-to-  
analogue converter generates an  
analogue signal based on these  
numbers. See also Sampling  
frequency and Analogue audio.  
Playlist  
From this list you can play back  
contents of a disc in your desired  
order or in sequence. It is also  
possible to directly search for a  
specific scene.  
Dolby Digital  
A system developed by Dolby  
Laboratories that compresses  
digital sound. It works with stereo  
(2ch) or multi-channel audio.  
96 EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
Specifications  
General  
System  
DVD-Video, DVD-RW/-R, DVD+RW/+R, CD-DA, CD-RW/-R  
VHS Video Cassette Tape  
VCR video heads  
Power requirements  
Power consumption  
Weight  
Four heads  
230–240V ~ 10%, 50Hz 0.5%  
35W (standby: 5.0W)  
4.4kg  
Dimensions (width x height x depth)  
Operating temperature  
Operating humidity  
TV format  
435 x 99.5 x 261mm  
5°C to 40°C  
Less than 80% (no condensation)  
PAL B/G  
Recording  
Recording format  
Video Recording format (DVD-RW only),  
Video format (DVD-RW, DVD-R)  
Recording discs  
DVD-ReWritable, DVD-Recordable  
Video recording format  
Sampling frequency  
Compression format  
13.5MHz  
MPEG  
Audio recording format  
Sampling frequency  
Compression format  
48kHz  
Dolby Digital  
Tuner  
Receivable channels  
E2-E69  
Note  
• The specifications and design of this product are subject to change without notice.  
EN 97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FOR LOCATION ENQUIRIES WITHIN  
AUSTRALIA  
REGARDING YOUR LOCAL  
SHARP APPROVED SERVICE CENTRE  
VISIT OUR WEBSITE AT  
www.sharp.net.au  
OR CALL SHARP CUSTOMER CARE  
1300 135 022  
(LOCAL CALL COST APPLY WITHIN AUSTRALIA)  
SHARP CORPORATION OF AUSTRALIA PTY LTD  
FOR LOCATION ENQUIRIES WITHIN  
NEW ZEALAND  
REGARDING YOUR LOCAL  
SHARP APPROVED SERVICE CENTRE  
VISIT OUR WEBSITE AT  
www.sharp.net.nz  
CONTACT YOUR SELLING DEALER/RETAILER  
OR CALL  
SHARP CUSTOMER SERVICES  
TELEPHONE: 09 573 0111  
FACSIMILE: 09 573 0113  
SHARP CORPORATION OF NEW ZEALAND LIMITED  
SPform019(JUNE 2004)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Congratulations on Your Purchase!  
This Sharp product is warranted against faults in materials and manufacture for a period  
of twelve (12) months from the date of original purchase.  
If service is required during the warranty period, please contact your nearest Sharp  
Approved Service Centre. These repairs would be carried out at no charge to the  
owner, subject to the conditions specified herein.  
The owner is responsible for any transportation and insurance costs if the product has  
to be returned for repair.  
This warranty does not extend to accessories or defects or injuries caused by or resulting  
from causes not attributable to faulty parts or the manufacture of the product, including  
but not limited to, defect or injury caused by or resulting from misuse, abuse, neglect,  
accidental damage, improper voltage, liquid spillage, vermin infestation, software, or  
any alterations made to the product which are not authorised by Sharp.  
Please retain your sales documentation, as this should be produced to validate a  
warranty claim.  
This warranty is in addition to and in no way limits, varies or excludes any express and  
implied rights and remedies under any relevant legislation in the country of sale.  
IMPORTANT  
DO NOT RETURN THIS DOCUMENT TO SHARP  
purchase  
For your reference, please enter the particulars of your  
below and retain, with your purchase documentation.  
Model No.  
Serial No.  
Date of Purchase  
Retailer  
SPform020 (JUNE 2004)  
IMPORTANT NOTICE: This warranty applies only to products sold in Australia & New Zealand  
9HS1VMN23152  
E9B38AD ★★★★★  
Printed in China  
1VMN23152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Sharp Calculator EL 344R User Manual
Sony Car Speaker NS410 User Manual
Sony CRT Television KDL 32W700B User Manual
Sony Ericsson Headphones HBH PV715 User Manual
Sony Laptop PCG F640 User Manual
Sony MP3 Player S2iP User Manual
Sony Projector 4 125 572 12 1 User Manual
Sony VCR CCD TR411E User Manual
Sylvania CD Player SRCD348 User Manual
Tanaka Brush Cutter TBC 200 User Manual